P. 1
Toshiba Tv Owners Manual05232RV525

Toshiba Tv Owners Manual05232RV525

|Views: 252|Likes:
Published by W. Brown

More info:

Published by: W. Brown on May 09, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

05/09/2011

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Important Safety Instructions
  • Installation, Care, and Service
  • Features of your new TV
  • TV back panel connections
  • Overview of cable types
  • About the connection illustrations
  • Connecting adigital audio system
  • Connecting an audio system
  • Connecting apersonal computer (PC)
  • Preparing the remote control for use
  • Installing the remote control batteries
  • Remote control effective range
  • Learning about the remote control
  • Using the remote control to control your other devices
  • Remote Control functional key chart
  • Main menu layout
  • Setup/Installation menu layout
  • Navigating the menu system
  • Selecting the menu language
  • To select the menu language:
  • Programming channels into the TV's channel memory
  • Programming channels automatically
  • To program channels automatically:
  • Labeling channels
  • Channel Labeling
  • Setting the HDMITM audio mode
  • Viewing the digital signal meter
  • To view the digital signal meter:
  • Setting the time zone
  • Viewing the system status
  • To view the system status:
  • Selecting the video input source to view
  • To select the video input source to view:
  • Labeling the video input sources
  • To label the video input sources:
  • Tuning channels using the Channel Browser™
  • Setting the Channel Tuning Mode
  • To set the Channel Tuning Mode:
  • Tuning to the next programmed channel
  • Selecting the picture size
  • Using the auto aspect ratio feature
  • Selecting the picture mode
  • Adjusting the picture
  • Selecting the cinema mode
  • Using the FREEZE feature
  • Adjusting the picture quality
  • To adjust the picture quality:
  • Using the closed caption mode
  • Base closed captions
  • Digital CC Settings
  • Adjusting the audio
  • Muting the sound
  • CC Selector
  • Using the digital audio selector
  • To use the digital audio selector:
  • Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts
  • Adjusting the audio quality
  • To adjust the audio quality:
  • Selecting the optical audio output format
  • If you cannot remember your PIN code
  • Changing your PIN code
  • Using the Locks menu
  • Blocking channels
  • Unlocking programs temporarily
  • Using the input lock feature
  • Using the GameTimer®
  • Using the control panel lock feature
  • Using the PC settings feature
  • Setting the sleep timer
  • Setting the PC Audio
  • VOLUME and MUTE controls of Audio Receiver
  • Understanding the auto power off feature
  • Displaying TV status information
  • Understanding the last mode memory feature
  • Using the advanced picture settings features
  • Using dynamic contrast
  • Using the static gamma feature
  • Using MPEG noise reduction
  • Using the Game Mode feature
  • Using the advanced audio settings features
  • Using the QSound® sound feature
  • General troubleshooting
  • for Toshiba Brand Flat Panel Televisions

TOSHIBA

Leading Innovation »>
Owner's Manual
Integrated High Definition
LCD Television
.. t 8fH
For an overview of steps for setting up your new TV, see page10.
Note: To display aHigh Definition picture, the TV must be receiving
aHigh Definition signal (such as an over-the-air High Definition
TV broadcast, aHigh Definition digital cable program, or aHigh
Definition digital satellite program). For details, please contact
your TV antenna installer, cable provider, or satellite provider.
It Makes ADifference How and Where You Use Your Flat
Panel Display
CHILD SAFETY:
Congratulations on your purchase! As you enjoy your
new product, please keep these safety tips in mind:
The Issue
• The home theater entertainment experience is agrowing trend
and larger flat panel displays are popular purchases. However,
flat panel displays are not always supported on the proper stands
or installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
• Flat panel displays that are
inappropriately situated on dressers,
bookcases, shelves, desks,
speakers, chests or carts may fall
over and cause injury.
TOSHIBA Cares!
• The consumer electronics industry
is committed to making home
entertainment enjoyable and safe
Safety Precautions
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE
OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER·SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
Dear Customer,
Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba LCD TV. This
manual will help you use the many exciting features
of your new LCD TV. Before operating your LCD TV,
please read this manual completely, and keep it
nearby for future reference.
www.CE.org/safety
A\
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
.... ~ . . presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the
........ - product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute arisk of electric shock to persons.
it
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
• operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING
To prevent injury, this apparatus must be securely
attached to the floor/wall in accordance with the
installation instructions. See item 23 on page 4.
WARNING: If you decide to wall mount this
television, always use aUL Listed wall bracket
appropriate for the size and weight of this television.
The use of any wall bracket other than aUL Listed
wall bracket appropriate for the size and weight of this
television for wall mounting this television could result
in serious bodily injury and/or property damage. See
"Removing the Pedestal Stand" (Ifill' page 6).
NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS
This is areminder to call the CATV system installer's
attention to Article 820-40 of the U.S. NEC, which
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building,
as close to the POint of cable entry as practical. For
additional antenna grounding information, see items
30 and 31 on page 4.
Tune Into Safety
• One size does NOT fit all. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations
for the safe installation and use of your flat panel display.
• Carefully read and understand all enclosed instructions for
proper use of this product.
• Don't allow children to climb on or play with furniture and
television sets.
• Don't place flat panel displays on
furniture that can easily be used as
steps, such as achest of drawers.
• Remember that children can
become excited while watching a
program, especially on a"larger
than life" flat panel display Care
should be taken to place or install
the display where it cannot be
pushed, pulled over, or knocked down.
• Care should be taken to route all cords and
cables connected to the flat panel display so that they cannot be
pulled or grabbed by curious children.
Wall Mounting: If you decide to wall mount your
flat panel display, always:
• Use amount that has been recommended by the display
manufacturer and/or listed by an independent laboratory (such
as UL, GSA, ETL).
• Follow all instructions supplied by the display and wall mount
manufacturers.
• If you have any doubts about your ability to safely install your
flat panel display, contact your retailer about professional
installation.
• Make sure that the wall where you are mounting the display is
appropriate. Some wall mounts are not designed to be mounted
to walls with steel studs or old cinder block construction If you
are unsure, contact a professional
installer.
• Aminimum of two people are
required for installation. Flat panel
displays can be heavy.
2
Important Safety Instructions
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
__ __ . .._.. __.
. __ ...... _...
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
--- -------- --- -.----
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
..... .
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized
or grounding type plug. Apolarized Wide blade
plug has two blades with one wider .....
than the other. Agrounding type .'.
plug has two blades and athird
grounding prong. The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the
provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an el.e.ctrician for __ ..
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on
or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point . ..•. '. ,-
. .. __ __ 'W=
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
. " - ...._---- -----, --_ .. _---------- _. . -------------._--. -' .._..---.-.-----------".. __ .- ..
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer,
or sold with the apparatus. When a _I
cart is used, use caution when moving
combination to avoid •
Injury from tip-over. 'i. _
- ----_._.',,--' ...-.------ .. _----_... _.... ---_.... ---_._-- ------ -.•.."-- -_.' .-.._---------.- _." - ..---
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms
or when unused for long periods of time.
-- -- - - -- .--- ------ - -- ---- ---- -- -- ----
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way, such
as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or
has been dropped.
Additional Safety Precautions
14a) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or
enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does
not operate normally, take the following precautions:
• ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power
cord to avoid possible electric shock or fire.
• NEVER allow your body to come in contact
with any broken glass or liquid from the
damaged television. The LCD panel inside the
TV contains glass and a toxic liquid. If the
liquid comes in contact with your mouth or
eyes, or your skin is cut by broken glass, rinse
the affected area thoroughly with water and
consult your doctor.
• ALWAYS contact aservice technician to inspect
the TV any time it has been damaged or dropped.
15) CAUTION:
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not
use the polarized plug with an extension cord,
receptacle, or other outlet unless the blades
can be inserted completely to prevent blade
exposure.
• To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of
______ __ __ .. .. '
16) WARNING:
To prevent the spread of fire, keep candles or other
open flames away from this product at all times.
Installation, Care, and Service
Installation
Follow these recommendations and precautions and
heed all warnings when installing your TV:
---- --- ---._- .. _-- ------_. ---, - -----_._- -- .. - - - --- ---- -- -- _. -- .....
17) WARNING: NEVER expose batteries to excessive
heat such as sunshine, fire or the like .
--_._-----_.. _. ._--- ---. _.. - ---------_._---_.... - - -
18) ALWAYS plug the product into an outlet
;j\
that is located in such amanner that
it can be easily unplugged in case the

...... -- .
19) NEVER route the product's power cord inside awall
or similar enclosed area.
20) Never modify this equipment. Changes or
modifications may void: a) the warranty, and b) the
user's authority to operate this equipment under the
rules of the Federal Communications Commission.
21) itDANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY, DEATH, OR EQUIPMENT
• DAMAGE!
Never place the TV on an unstable (I)
cart, stand, or table. The TV may 1I1
fall, causing serious personal •
injury, death, or serious damage i
to the TV
._-- -_. --_.. _--- --_. ---._-_. -- - -- - .._------------ ._--- ._. _. ---- '--
22) To avoid damage to this product, never place or store
the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; or areas
subject to excessive dust or vibration.
(COli! illllcd)
3
23) Always place the TV on the floor or asturdy, level,
stable surface that can support the weight of the unit.
To secure the TV, use asturdy strap from the hook(s)
on the rear of the TV to awall stud, pillar, or other
immovable structure. Make sure the strap is tight,
secure, and parallel to the floor.
JH'
f;:::;. Sturdy strap (as.. s. h.•o....r...t. a.s possible)
. 4"
min. HO(Ok 9
. J
TV side TV top
24) The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such
, ., .. .. .. ..
25) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV
cabinet back, bottom, and sides. Never place the TV:
• on abed, sofa, rug, or
similar surface;
• too close to drapes,
curtains, or walls; or
• in aconfined space such
as abookcase, built-in
cabinet, or any other place with poor ventilation.
The slots and openings are provided to protect the
TV from overheating and to help maintain reliable
operation of the TV. Leave aspace of at least 4(four)
inches around the TV.
--"._._------------- --------------
26) Always place the back of the television at least four
(4) inches away from any vertical surface (such as a
._.._.... _. __.._..__..__..
27) Never allow anything to rest on or rollover the power
cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is
.......... ..
28) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.
,-. ---_.. ---- -. --_._---- ---'.•." - ----,- .-.__.. __...._._-------
29) Always operate this equipment from a120 VAC, 60
.._... ..Q.oJy.:. .._.. ...__ . ..... __ ....
30) Always make sure the antenna system is properly
grounded to provide adequate protection against
voltage surges and built-up static charges (see
Section 810 of the National Electric Code).
31) Lh DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!

• Use extreme care to make sure you are never
ina position where your body (or any item
you are in contact with, such as aladder or
screwdriver) can accidentally touch overhead
power lines. Never locate the antenna near
overhead power lines or other electrical
circuits.
• Never attempt to install any of the following
during lightning activity: a) an antenna
system; or b) cables, wires, or any home
theater component connected to an antenna
or phone system.
Care
For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA
TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:
32) If you use the TV in a room whose temperature is
32 OF (0 °C) or below, the picture brightness may
vary until the LCD warms up. This is not asign of
malfunction.
33) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. Gently wipe
the display panel surface (the TV screen) using adry,
soft cloth only (cotton, flannel, etc.). Ahard cloth
may damage the surface of the panel. Avoid contact
with alcohol, thinner,
benzene, acidic or alkaline
solvent cleaners, abrasive
cleaners, or chemical
cloths, which may damage
the surface. Never spray
volatile compounds such as insecticide on the
cabinet. Such products may damage or discolor the
cabinet.
34) WARNING: ;j\
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! Lb
Never spill liquids or push objects of any kind into
the TV cabinet slots.
35) While it is thundering, do not touch the
connecting cables or apparatus.
---_._------------------------------,-._-----------._---------
36) For added protection of your TV from lightning
and power surges, always unplug the power
cord and disconnect the antenna from the TV if
you leave the TV unattended or unused for long
periods of time.
/ Antenna lead-in wire
Antenna discharge unit
(NEC Section 810-20)
Grounding conductors
(NEC Section 810-21)
/'
. Power service grounding
/.-:-- electrode system
(NEC Art 250 Part-H) Ground clamps
//
// /Ground clamp
..
Electric service
equipment
(cOlltinued)
4
37) ALWAYS unplug the TV to completely disconnect
from mains power. When the TV is turned off using
the on/off switch, it is not completely disconnected
from power and aminute amount of current is still
consumed.
38) During normal use, the TV may make occasional
snapping or popping sounds. This is normal,
especially when the unit is being turned on or off. If
these sounds become frequent or continuous, unplug
the power cord and contact aToshiba Authorized
Service Center.
42) If you have the TV serviced:
• Ask the service technician to use only replacement
parts specified by the manufacturer.
• Upon completion of service, ask the service
technician to perform routine safety checks to
_. __!ha!..!he}V is in
43) The cold cathode fluorescent lamp in the LCD panel
contains asmall amount of mercury.
When the TV reaches the end of its useful life,
dispose of the used TV by the approved method for
your area, or ask aqualified service technician to
properly dispose of the TV.
Note: The lamp(s) inside this product
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
39) LhDANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS i
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH! i
• .._"l"'ll!'b. II
0J)

Never strike the screen I
___ I
40) • The LCD screen of this product can be damaged i
by ultraviolet radiation from the sun. When II
selecting alocation for the television, avoid I'
locations where the screen may be exposed to
direct sunlight, such as in front of awindow. I
• Never touch, press, or place anything on the LCD II,
screen. These actions will damage the LCD screen.
I
Never attempt to service the TV yourself. Opening I
and removing the covers may expose you to I
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Failure to follow ;1;
this WARNING may result in death or serious injury.
Refer all servicing not specified in this manual to a ,II
Toshiba Authorized Service Center.
I
I
I
contain mercury Disposal may be regulated
due to environmental considerations. For
disposal or recycling information, contact
your local authorities or the Electronics
Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).
Choosing a location for your LCD TV
To Display your LCD TV on the included
Pedestal Stand:
Observe the following safety precautions:
I) Read and Follow the pedestal assembly instructions
included with the pedestal.
CAUTION: Before beginning pedestal assembly,
carefully lay the front of the LCD Panel face down
on a flat, cushioned surface such as a quilt or blanket.
Leave the bottom of the unit protruding over the edge
of the surface and assemble the pedestal as indicated
below.
Note: Extreme care should always be used
when attaching the pedestal stand to avoid
damage to the LCD panel.
2) Place the TV on a sturdy, level surface that can
support the weight of the TV.
3) Be sure to secure the TV to a wall, pillar. surface, or
other immovable structure. (1& item 23, page 4).
To Display your LCD TV using a Wall
Bracket:
If you decide to wall mount your LCD TV, always use
a UL listed wall bracket appropriate for the size and
weight of the LCD TV (1& page 2):
I) CAUTION: Two people are required for installation.
2) Unplug and remove any cables and/or other
component connectors from the rear of the TV.
3) Remove the screws of the VESA Mounting Pattern
show in the right diagram.
4) Follow the instructions provided with your
wall bracket. Before proceeding. make sure the
appropriate bracket(s) are attached to the wall and
the back of the TV as described in the instructions
provided with the wall bracket.
5) After attaching the appropriate bracket(s) to the wall
and the back of the TV, remove the pedestal stand
from the TV as described below.
(continued)
5
40" TV
CAUTION: Always place the TV on the floor or asturdy,
level, stable surface that can support the weight of
the unit. To secure the TV, use asturdy strap from
the hook(s) on the rear of the TV to awall stud, pillar,
or other immovable structure. Make sure the strap is
tight, secure, and parallel to the floor.
Sturdy strap
(as short as possible)
Hook
Sturdy strap
(as short as possible)
VESA Mounting Pattern
VESA Mounting Pattern
Four screws
Four screws
46" TV
VESA Mounting Pattern
Four screws Sturdy strap
(as short as possible)
(unit in mm)
Note: Extreme care should always be used
when removing the pedestal stand to avoid
damage to the LCD panel.
VESA Mounting Pattern
Removing the Pedestal Stand
I) Carefully lay the front of the unit face down on a tlat.
cushioned surface such as a quilt or blanket. Leave
the stand protruding over the edge of the surface.
37" TV
2) Remove the four screws shown in the right diagram.
This wi II allow removal of the pedestal stand.
3) Once you have removed all four screws, holding the
pedestal stand in place, remove the pedestal sland
from the TV.
32" TV
6) VESA Mounting Pattern
TV Size Hole Pattern(HxV) Screw Size
31" 200x200 mm M6
31" 200x200 mm M6
40" 200x200 mm M6
46" 400x200 mm MR
Four screws
Hook
Sturdy strap
(as short as possible)
6
FCC Declaration of Conformity
Compliance Statement (Part 15):
The Toshiba 32RV525RZ, 32RV52RZ, 37RV525RZ,
37RV52RZ,40RV525R,40RV525RZ,40RV52R,
40RV52RZ, 46RV525R, and 46RV525RZ Televisions
comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(I) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The party responsible for compliance to these rules is:
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
82 Totowa Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470.
Ph: 1-800-631-3811
Note: This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and if not installed and used in accordance with
the Instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by removing
and applying power to the equipment, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
ditferent from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radiorrV
technician for help.
Caution: Changes or modifications to this
equipment not expressly approved by Toshiba
could void the user's authority to operate this
equipment.
ENERGYSTAf(BJ User
Information
ENERGY STAR User Information Statement: the
factory default settings of this television meet ENERGY
STAR requirements. Changing Picture Settings may
increase energy consumption, possibly beyond the limits
required for ENERGY STAR qualification.
To ensure your television is operating at optimal energy
efficiency, select [Home1mode during initial activation.
To return to [Home] mode settings. select [Standard]
picture mode. [Standard] mode is recommended for
normal home use.
ENERGY STAR® qualified TV.
Products that earn the ENERGY
STAR prevent green house
gas emissions by meeting
strict guidelines set by the
U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency. ENERGY STAR and
the ENERGY STAR mark are
registered U.S. marks.
Important notes about your
LCD TV
The following symptoms are technical limitations
of LCD Display technology and are not an
indication of malfunction; therefore, Toshiba is
not responsible for perceived issues resulting from
these symptoms.
1) An afterimage (ghost) may appear on the screen if
a fixed, nonmoving image is displayed for a long
period of time. The afterimage is not permanent
and will disappear in a short period of time.
2) The LCD panel contained in this T ~ is
manufactured using an extremely high level
of precision technology: however, there may
be an occasional pixel (dot of light) that does
not operate properly (does not light, remains
constantly lit, etc.). This is a structural property of
LCD technology, is not a sign of malfunction. and
is not covered under your warranty. Such pixels
are not visible when the picture is viewed from a
normal viewing distance.
Note: Interactive video games that involve
shooting a "gun" type of joystick at an on-
screen target may not work with this TV
Trademark Information
• OSound and [ ~ ] symbol are trademarks of
OSound Labs, Inc.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
7
Contents
Important Safety Instructions 3
Installation, Care, and Service 3
Chapter 1: Introduction 9
Features of your new TV 9
Overview of steps for installing. setting up, and using
your new TV 10
TV front and side panel controls and connections ll
TV back panel connections 12
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV 13
Overview of cable types 13
About the connection illustrations 13
Connecting a VCR (or a VCR with S-video) and antenna,
Cable TV or Camcorder 14
Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream'
(component video), a VCR, and a satellite receiver ... 15
Connecting an HDMITM or DVI device to the
HOMI input 16
REGZA-LlNK® connection 17
Connecting a digital audio system 18
Connecting an audio system 18
Connecting a personal computer (PC) 19
Chapter 3: Using the remote control 20
Prcparing the remote control for use 20
Installing the remote control batteries 20
Remote control effective range 20
Learning about the remote c;ntrol 21
Using the remote control to control your other devices 22
Remote Control functional key chart... 23
Programming the remote control to control
your other devices 24
Remote control codes 25
Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation 27
Main menu 1ayout... 27
Setup/Installation menu layou!. 28
Navigating the menu system 28
Chapter 5: Setting up your TV 29
Setting the Energy Saving Mode 29
Selecting the menu language 29
TOSHIBA Logo LED 29
Configuring the antenna input source for the
ANT/CABLE terminal 29
Programming channels into the TV's channel memory 30
Programming channels automatically 30
Manually adding and deleting channels in
the channel memory 30
Labeling channels 31
Setting the HDMFM audio mode 32
Viewing the digital signal meter. 33
Setting the time zone 33
Viewing the system status 33
Chapter 6: Using the TV's features 34
Selecting the video input source to view 34
Labeling the video input sources 34
Tuning channels 35
. Tuning channels using the Channel Browser
DI
35
Setting the Channel Tuning Mode 37
Tuning to the next programmed channe!.. 38
Tuning to a specific channel (programmed or
unprogrammed) 38
Switching between two channels using
Channel Return 38
Switching between two channels using SurfLock
H1
38
Selecting the picture size 38
8
Scrolling the TheaterWide@ picture
(TheaterWide 2 and 3 only) 40
Using the auto aspect ratio feature 40
Selecting the cinema mode 41
Using the FREEZE feature 41
Adjusting the picture 41
Selecting the picture mode 41
Adjusting the picture quality 42
Using the closed caption mode 42
Base closed captions 42
Digital CC Settings 43
CC Selector 43
Adjusting the audio 43
Muting the sound 43
Using the digital audio selector 43
Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts 44
Adjusting the audio quality 44
Selecting the optical audio output fonnat... 44
Using the Dolbl' Digital Dynamic Range Control
feature 45
Usin
o
the Locks menu 45
the PIN code 45
If you cannot remember your PIN code 45
Changing your PIN code 45
Blocking TV programs and movies
by rating (V-Chip) 45
Downloading an additional rating system for
blocking TV programs and movies 46
Blocking channels 47
Unlocking programs temporarily 48
Using the input lock feature 48
Using the GameTimer@ 48
Using the control panel lock feature 49
Using the PC settings feature 49
Setting the PC Audio 50
Settin the sleep timer 50
® "0
Using REGZA-L1NK )
REGZA-L1NK0 playback device
(DVD player, etc.) control 50
REGZA-L1NK® input source selection 51
VOLUME and MUTE controls of Audio Receiver 51
Other functions 51
Displaying TV status information 52
Understanding the auto power off feature 52
Undcrstanding the last mode memory feature 52
Chapter 7: Using the TV's advanced features 53
Using the advanced picture settings features 53
Using dynamic contrast 53
Using the static gamma feature 53
Using digital noise reduction 54
Using MPEG noise reduction 54
Using the Game Mode teature 54
Usin
o
the advanced audio settings features 55
b (f
Using the QSound') sound feature 55
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting 56
General troubleshooting 56
Chapter 9: Appendix 58
Specifications 58
Acceptable signal fonnats for PC IN and
HDMlterminals 59
Limited United States Warranty
for LCD Televisions 26" and Larger. 60
Limited Canadian Warranty
for Toshiba Brand Flat Panel Televisions 61
Features of your new TV
The following are just a few of the many exciting
features of your new Toshiba widescreen, integrated
HD, LCD TV:
• Integrated digital tuning (8VSB ATSC and
QAM) eliminates the need for a separate digital
converter set-top box (in most cases).
• I080p output resolution.
• Three HDMJTM digital, high-definition
multimedia interfaces I080p input support (IrE
page 16).
• HDMI new capability
Lip-Sync Latency activates an audio/video
display timing adjustment function that allows
HDMI source devices to accurately perform
synchronization automatically.
• Two sets of ColorStream® HD high-resolution
component video inputs (IrE page 15).
• QSound® audio technologies (IrE page 52).
• Digital Audio Out optical audio connection with
Dolby® Digital optical output format (IrE page 45).
• CableClear® digital picture noise reduction (IrE
page 54).
• PC IN (Analog RGB) computer terminal (IrE page
19).
• Channel Labeling allows you to put the Call
Letters (e.g. ABC, HBO, etc.) on the screen along
with the station numbers, so you always know
what you're watching
(IrE page 31).
• REGZA-LINK allows control of external devices
from the TV remote via HDMI connection(1rE
page 50).
9
Overview of steps for installing,
setting up, and using your new TV
Follow these steps to set up your TV and begin using
its many exciting features.
1 Carefully read the important safety, installation,
care, and service information. Keep this manual
for flllure reference.
2 Observe the following when choosing a location
for the TV:
• Read "Important notes about your LCD TV"
( u ~ \ ' page 7).
• Place the TV on the noor or a sturdy, level.
stable surface that can support the weight of the
unit. Secure the TV to a wall. pillar, or other
immovable structure (I@\' page 4).
• Place the TV in a location where light does not
reflect on the screen.
• Place the TV far enough frol11 walls and other
objects to allow proper ventilation, Inadeljuate
ventilation may cause overheating. which will
damage the TV THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE
IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA
WARRANTY.
3 Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you
have connected all cables and devices to your TV
4 BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV
learn the functions (;-]. the TV's connections and
controls (1fM' pages I 1-12).
5 Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV
( u , ~ ' pages D-19).
6 Install the batteries in the remote control (Irs" page
20).
7 See "Learning about the remote control" (I@' page
21 ) for an overview of the buttons on the remote
control.
8 Program the remote control to operate your other
devlce(s) (((i'\' pages 22-26).
9 AFTER connecting all cables and devices, plug
in the power cords for your TV and other devices.
Then press POWER on the TV control panel or
remote control to turn on the TV If the TV stops
responding to the controls on the remote control
or TV control panel and you cannot turn the TV
off or on, please unplug the power cords few
seconds then re-plug to try again,
I 10
10 See "Menu layout and navigation" for a ljuick
overview of navigating the TV's menu system
(II§,' page 27).
11 Program channels into the TV's channel memory
( o ~ ' page 30).
12 For details on using the TV's features, see
Chapters 6 and 7.
13 For help, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide.
Chapter 8.
14 For technical specifications and warranty
information, see Chapter 9,
15 Enjoy your new TV'
TV front and side panel controls and connections
Model40RV525RZ is used in this manual for illustration purposes.
TV top
2 1
TV front
SERVKJE
ONLY
4-
1
'------'
Control panel
1 Green LED and TOSHIBA Logo LED
Power LED(Green) = Power indicator
TOSHIBA Logo LED= On or Off (1& page 28).
2 Remote sensor - Point the remote control
toward this remote sensor (1& "Remote control
effective range" on page 20).
3 VIDEO-2 IN - The side panel AN connections
are refened to as "VIDEO 2" and include standard
AN connections.
6 ARROWS A ....... ~ - When a menu is on-
screen, these buttons function as up/down/left!
right menu navigation buttons.
7 MENU (ENTER) - Press to access the menu
system (1& pages 27-28). When a menu is on-
screen, the MENU button on the TV's control
panel functions as the ENTER button.
8 EXIT - Press to instantly close an on-screen
menu.
4 Service port - For service use only. Used for
updating the television's firmware.
5 POWER - Press to tum the TV on and off.
If the TV stops responding to the controls on
the remote control or TV control panel and
you cannot tum off the TV, press and hold the
POWER button on the TV control panel for 5 or
more seconds to reset the TV.
9 CHANNEL A.... - When no menu is on-screen,
these buttons change the channel (programmed
channels only; 1& page 30).
10 VOLUME .... ~ - These buttons adjust the
volume level.
11 INPUT - Repeatedly press to change the source
you are viewing (ANT/CABLE, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2,
ColorStream H01, ColorStream H02, HOMI1,
HOMI 2, HOMI 3, PC).
11
TV back panel connections
For an explanation of cable types and connections, see pages 1 4 ~ 2 0 .
1
TV back
1 HDMITM IN - High-Definition Multimedia
Interface input receives digital audio and
uncompressed digital video from an HDMI
device or uncompressed digital video from a DVI
device. HDMI connection is necessary to receive
I080p signals.
2 ColorStream® HD-l and ColorStream® HD-2
- Two sets of ColorStream® high-definition
component video inputs (with standard stereo
audio inputs) for connecting devices with
component video output, such as a Toshiba DVD
player with ColorStream®.
Note: Component video cables carry only
video information; separate audio cables
are required for a complete connection.
3 VIDEO-l IN - Standard (composite) video and
standard audio inputs plus optional S-video
inputs for connecting devices with composite
video or S-video output.
Note: Standard (composite) video and
S-video cables carry only video information;
separate audio cables are required for a
complete connection.
I 12
4 Audio OUT Variable - Analog audio outputs for
connecting an audio amplifier.
5 ANT/CABLE - Antenna input that supports
analog (NTSC) and digital (ATSC) off-air
antenna signals and analog and digital Cable TV
(QAM) signals.
6 Digital Audio OUT - Optical audio output in
Dolby Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation)
format for connecting an external Dolby Digital
decoder, amplifier, A/V receiver, or home theater
system with optical audio input.
7 PCIHDMI-l (AUDIO) IN - PC audio input
terminals are shared with HDMI-I analog audio
input terminals, and their use can be configured
in the Audio Setup menu (u:w page 50).
8 PC IN - For use when connecting a personal
computer.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Overview of cable types
Cables can be purchased from most stores that sell audio/
video devices. Before purchasing any cables, be sure of
connector types required by your devices and the length
of each cable.
Coaxial (F-type) cable
@ ) ~ ~ - - - - -
Coaxial (F-type) cable is used for connecting your
antenna, cable TV service, and/or cable converter box
to the ANT/CABLE input on your TV.
Standard AN cables (red/white/yellow)
~ ~ ~ - ~ - - - - -
~
Standard AN cables (composite video) usually come
in sets of three, and are for use with video devices with
analog audio and composite video output. These cables
(and the related inputs on your TV) are typically color-
coded according to use: yellow for video, red for stereo
right audio, and white for stereo left (or mono) audio.
S-video cable
~ ~ UJIIIW--------
S-video cable is for use with video devices with
S-video output. Separate audio cables are required for a
complete connection.
Note: An S-video cable provides better picture
performance than a composite video cable. If you
connect an S-video cable, be sure to disconnect
the standard (composite) video cable or the picture
performance will be unacceptable.
Component video cables (red/green/blue)
I ~ · - - - ­
~ ~
Component video cables come in sets of three and are
for use with video devices with component video output.
(ColorStream® is Toshiba's brand of component video.)
These cables are typically color-coded red, green, and
blue. Separate audio cables are required for a complete
connection.
Note: Component video cables provide better
picture performance than a standard (composite)
video or S-video cable.
HOMITM cable
(with HOMI Logo "HOml")
O ~
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) cable
is for use with devices with an HDM! output. An
HDMI cable delivers digital audio and video in its
native format. This cable carries both video and audio
information; therefore, separate audio cables are not
required for a complete HDMI device connection (1&
page 16 and page 19).
Note: HOMI cable provides better picture
performance than a standard (composite) video or
S-video cable.
Optical audio cable
[Q] cECJ::lto----
Optical audio cable is for connecting receivers with
Dolby Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) optical
audio input to the TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal
(1& page 18).
Analog RGB (1S-pin) computer cable
i{D;==
Analog RGB (IS-pin) computer cable is for connecting
a PC to the TV's PC IN terminal (1& page 19).
About the connection illustrations
You can connect different types and brands of devices to
your TV in several different configurations. The connection
illustrations in this manual are representative of typical
device connections only. The input/output terminals on
your devices may differ from those illustrated herein. For
details on connecting and using your specific devices, refer
to each device's owner's manual.
13 I
Connecting aVCR (or a VCR with S-video) and antenna, Cable TV or
Camcorder
From Cable TV or From Cable TV
antenna Camcorder
AUDIO
OUT

on TV right side
panel
r---...

I

I AUDIO :;:
'..:::.u.- ..........; ..... J

SERVICE
ONLY
You will need:
• coaxial cables
• S-video cable
- For better picture performance, if your VCR
has S-video, use an S-video cable (plus the
audio cables) instead of the standard video
cable. 00 not connect both types of video
cable to VIDEO 1at the same time or the
picture performance will be unacceptable.
- For better picture performance, if your
camcorder has S-video, connect an S-video
cable (plus the audio cables) to VIDEO 1 on
the TV back side instead of the VIDEO 2 on
the TV side panel.
- If you have a mono VCR, connect UMaNa
on the TV to your VCR's audio out terminal
using the white audio cable only
• S-video cable (if your VCR or camcorder has S-video)
00 not connect both types of video cable
to VIDEO 1at the same time or the picture
performance will be unacceptable.
• standard audio cables (If you have a mono VCR or
camcorder has S-video)
Note: When you use a Cable box, you may not
be able to use the remote control to program or
access certain features on the TV.
To view the antenna or Cable signal:
Select the ANTICABLE video input source on the TV. *
To view basic and premium Cable channels:
Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANTICABLE video
input source on the TV. * Tune the TV to channel 3 or
4 (whichever channel the Cable box output is set to).
Use the Cable box controls to change channels.
To view the VCR:
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input
source on the TV. *
To view the camcorder video:
Select the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV. *
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on
the remote control (1rW page 21). To program the
TV remote control to operate other devices, see
Chapter 3.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or
revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs,
and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright
Laws of the United States and other countries, and may
subject you to civil and criminal liability.
I 14
Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream® (component video), a VCR,
and a satellite receiver
Your TV has two sets of ColorStream® (component video) inputs.
Satellite receiver with component video
...---
L.....__...I
You will need:
• coaxial cables
• standard NV cables
- For better picture performance, if your VCR
has S-video, use an S-video cable (plus the
audio cables) instead of the standard video
cable. 00 not connect both types of video
cable to VIDEO 1 at the same time or the
picture performance will be unacceptable.
- If you have a mono VCR, connect UMaNa
on the TV to your VCR's audio out terminal
using the white audio cable only
• standard audio cables
• component video cables
- You can connect the component video cables
(plus audio cables) from the OVO player or
satellite receiver to either set of ColorStream
terminals on the TV (HD-1 or HD-2). The
ColorStream HD-1 and HD-2 terminals
can be used with Progressive (480p, 720p)
and Interlaced (480i, 1080i) scan systems.
A 1080i signal will provide the best picture
performance (1080p is not supported).
- If your OVO player or satellite receiver does
not have component video, connect a
standard ANcable to VIDEO 2 on the side
panel. If your OVO player has HOMI video,
see page 16.
To view antenna or Cable channels:
Select the ANT/CABLE video input source on the TV. *
To view the DVD player:
Turn ON the DVD player. Select the ColorStream
HD-1 video input source on the TV. *
To view satellite programs using the
component video connections:
Turn on the satellite receiver. Select the ColorStream
HD-2 video input source on the TV. *
To view the VCR or view and record
antenna channels:
Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel you want
to watch. Select the VIDEO 1video input source on the TV. *
To record a TV program while watching a DVD:
Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel to
record. Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source
on the TV* to view the DVD.
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on
the remote control (1& page 21). To program the
TV remote control to operate other devices, see
Chapter 3.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or
revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs,
and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright
Laws of the United States and other countries, and may
subject you to civil and criminal liability.
15 I
Connecting an HDMITM or DVI
device to the HDMI input
The HDMI input on your TV receives digital audio
and uncompressed digital video from an HDMI
source device, or uncompressed digital video from a
DVI (Digital Visual Interface) source device.
This input is designed to accept HDCP (High-
Bandwidth Digital-Content Protection) program
material in digital form from EIA/CEA-861-D-
compliant[ll consumer electronic devices (such as
a set-top box or DVD player with HDMI or DVI
output).
The HDMI input can accept and display VGA,
SVGA, XGA, WXGA, SXGA, 480i (60Hz), 480p
(60Hz), nop (60Hz), 1080i (60Hz) and I080p
(24Hz/60Hz) signal formats. For detailed signal
specifications, see page 59.
Supported Audio format: Linear PCM, sampling rate
32/44.11 48 kHz
Note: To connect a PC to the HOMI input, see page 19.
To connect an HDMI device, you will need:
• one HDMI cable (type A connector) per HDMI device
- For proper operation, it is recommended that
you use an HOMI cable with the HOMI Logo (
HOml).
- To display an 1080i/60Hz signal format, you
will need a Category 2 cable. Conventional
HOMI/OVI cable may not work properly
- HOMI cable transfers both video and audio.
Separate analog audio cables are not
required (see illustration).
- See "Setting the HOMITM audio mode"
(1& page 34).
To view the HDMI device video:
Select the HDMI 1, HDMI 2 or HDMI 3 video input
source on the TV. *
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on
the remote control page 21). To program the
TV remote control to operate other devices, see
Chapter 3.
16
To connect a DVI device, you will need:
• one HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable (HDMI type A
connector) per DVI device
- For proper operation, the length of an HOMI-
to-OVI adapter cable should not exceed 9.8 ft
(3m). The recommended length is 6.6 ft (2m).
• one pair of standard analog audio cables per DVI
device
- An HOMI-to-OVI adapter cable transfers
video only Separate analog audio cables
are required (see illustration).
- See "Setting the HOMfT
M
audio mode"
(1& page 32).
TV back panel
I
I HDmI
, 2 3
e BJ i
v@T@ €
"IQ\;IQ\. 1

'.@',@
&:\ [Q]
w· """..
r@ '@
.@ @
Note: To ensure that the HOMI or OVI device is reset
properly it is recommended that you follow these
procedures:
• When turning on your electronic components,
turn on the TV first, and then the HOMlor
OVI device.
• When turning off your electronic components,
turn off the HDMI or DVI device first, and
then the TV.
[1] EIA/CEA-861-D compliance covers the
transmission of uncompressed digital video
with high-bandwidth digital content protection,
which is being standardized for reception of
high-definition video signals. Because this is
an evolving technology, it is possible that some
devices may not operate properly with the TV.
HDMI, the HOMIIogo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC.
REGZA-LINK@) connection
You can control the basic functions of connected audio/video devices using the TV's remote control if you
connect a REGZA-LINK compatible audio receiver or playback device. For an explanation of setup and
operations, see pages 51.
TV back panel
,----HDMIIN -----,
Hi:Jml
2 3
Playback device
(REGZA-L1NK DVD player,etc.)
Playback device
(REGZA-L1NK HD DVD player,etc.)
~ ; ; ~ g 4 ' -8'-] , ~ " -' . .' II ill ill
To connect an Audio Receiver and Playback
Devices, you will need:
• HDMI cables (1& page 16)
Note:
• If several devices are connected, REGZA-LINK
feature may not operate properly.
• For proper operation, it is recommended that you
use HDMI cables with the HDMI Logo
(HOm. ).
Before controlling the device(s):
• After completing the above connections, set the
REGZA-liNK Setup menu as you desire (1& page
51).
• The connected devices must also be set. For
details, see the operation manual for each device.
• The REGZA-LINK feature uses the CEC
technology as regulated by the HDMI standard.
• This feature is limited to models incorporating
Toshiba's REGZA-LINK. However, Toshiba is not
liable for those operations. Refer to the individual
instruction manuals for compatibility information.
Note: This feature may not work properly
depending on the devices that are connected.
17 I
You will need:
Connecting a digital audio system
You will need:
• standard audio cables
standard optical out signals may not work
properly, creating a high noise level that
may damage speakers or headphones
THIS DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR
WARRANTY
• The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal may not
output some digital audio sources because
of copy restrictions.
* Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
This connection allows you to use external speakers with
an external analog audio amplitier to adjust the sound level.
Connecting an audio system
[i ..
L.INiJ'NCj;;;;;:'"
L R AlJd'o IN
@ .. @. [Q]
.V;Io
o
o
• optical audio cable (Use an optical audio cable
that has the larger "TosLink" connector and not
the smaller "mini-optical" connector.)
Dolby Digital decoder or
other digital audio system
The TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs a
Dolby'()o1' or 2-channel down-mixed
peM (pulse-code modulation) signal for use with
an external Dolby@ Digital decoder or other external
audio system with optical audio input.
TV back panel
o
o
Analog audio amplifier
o
o
Audio
Digital Audio Selector
TV back panel
..-.. -""-"1
'@I@ ©
"fJ ,c,'-J
r@ @ @.
1
:OLOR COlOR I
SWM
M
R
To control the audio:
1 Turn on the TV and the stereo amplifier.
2 Set up a optimum volume level of the stereo amplifier.
Then you can adjust the sound volume level from the
TV's volume control or the amplifier's volume control.
3 Menu item of Speakers can turn to OFF to mute the
TV's built in speakers.
No
Auto
Stereo
PC Audio
HDMI 1 Audio
MTS
Audio Setup
4 In the Optical Output Format field. select either Dolby
Digital or PCM, depending on your device (1l;;,"Selecting
the optical audio output format" on page 44).
DIGITAL
AUDIOOUT
Audio
Digital Audio Selector
Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings
To control the audio:
1 Turn on the TV and the digital audio device.
2
MENU , I I I
Press 0 on the TV s remote contro anl open t le
Audio menu.
3 Highlight Audio Setup and press @.
English
Advanced Audio
Audio Setup
Dolby Digital
Dynamic Range Control
Compressed
Note:
• Some audio systems may not be compatible
with Dolby Digital bitstream signals Older
audio systems that are not compatible with
Reset Done Audio settings
Bass
Treble
Balance
Reset
10
10
o
Done
o
o
o
I 18
PC audio
cable
PC audio
output
I 6 Ground II
2 G 7 Ground 12 SDA
3 B 8 Ground 13 H-sync
4· Reserved 9 5V 14 V-sync
5 Reserved 10 Ground 15 SCL
,.--- HOMIIN
Homl
2 3
a c:l2 ----1IIIIllIl
The HDMI input can accept and display VGA, SVGA,
XGA, WXGA, SXGA, 480i (60Hz), 480p (60Hz), nop
(60Hz), I080i (60Hz), and I080p (24Hz/60Hz) signal
formats. For detailed signal specifications, see page 59.
Note:
• The edges of the images may be hidden.
• If receiving a 480i (HOM!), 480p (HoMI), 720p,
1080i, or 1080p signal program, Native mode
scales the video to display the entire picture within
the borders of the screen (i.e. no overscanning).
To connect a PC to the HDMI terminal on the TV:
When connecting a PC to the HDMI terminal on the
TV, use an HDMI-to DVI adapter cable and analog
audio cables.
If connecting a PC with an HDMI terminal, use an
HDMI cable (type A connector). Separate analog
cables are not necessary 15).
TV back panel
PC audio
output
Conversion adapter
(if necessary)
• To use a PC, set the monitor output resolution on the
PC before connecting it to the TV. The PC IN terminal
can accept and display VGA, SVGA, XGA, WXGA and
SXGA signal formats. For detailed signal specifications
(1& page 59).
Other formats or non-standard signals will not be
displayed correctly.
• To display the optimum picture, use the PC setting
feature (1& "Using the PC settings feature" on page 48).
Note:
• The PC audio input terminals on the TV are shared
with the HOMI-1 analog audio input terminals (1&
page 48).
• Some PC models cannot be connected to this TV
• An adapter is not needed for computers with a
compatible mini O-sub15-pin terminal.
• Depending on the OVO'S title and the
specifications of the PC on which you are playing
the OVO-Video, some scenes may be skipped or
you may not be able to pause during multi-angle
scenes.
To connect a PC to the PC IN terminal on the TV:
When connecting a PC to the PC IN terminal on the TV, use
an analog RGB (15-pin) computer cable and a PC audio cable.
TV back panel
"':;';'I':l
1 2 3
t3
'

J'(lg',b <=1__----,


\([?)@ ';@ [@J--]
R@
With either the PC IN or HDMI connection, you can watch
your computer's display on the TV and hear the sound
from the TV's speakers.
Connecting apersonal computer (PC)
19 I
Preparing the remote control for
use
Your TV remote control can operate your TV and
many other devices such as cable converter boxes,
satellite receivers, VCRs, DVD players, and HTIBs
(home theater in a box), even if they are different
brands.
If you have a Toshiba device:
Your TV remote control is preprogrammed to operate
most Toshiba devices ( ~ p a g e 24).
If you have a non·Toshiba device or a
Toshiba device that the remote control is not
preprogrammed to operate:
You can program the TV remote control so it will
operate the other device ( ~ p a g e s 22-26).
Installing the remote control
batteries
1 Remove the battery cover from the back of the
remote control.
• If the remote control does not operate
correctly, or if the operating range becomes
reduced, replace batteries with new ones.
• When necessary to replace batteries in the
remote control, always replace both batteries
with new ones. Never mix battery types or use
new and used batteries in combination.
• Always remove batteries from the remote
control if they are dead or if the remote
control is not to be used for an extended
period of time. This will prevent battery acid
from leaking into the battery compartment.
Remote control effective range
For optimum performance, aim the remote control
directly at the TV and make sure there is no
obstruction between the remote control and the TV.
Point remote control
toward remote sensor
on front of TV.
Squeeze tab
and lift cover.
r
2 Install two "AAA" size batteries, making sure to
match the + and - signs on the batteries to the
signs on the battery compartment.
3 Reinsert the battery cover in. the remote control
until the tab snaps.
Caution: Batteries must not be exposed to
excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the
like.
Note:
• Be sure to use AAA size batteries.
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal
area.
• Batteries should always be disposed of with
the environment in mind. Always dispose of
batteries in accordance with applicable laws
and regulations.
I 20
16.4 It (5m)
I
Learning about the remote control
The buttons used for operating the TV only are
described here. For a complete list of the remote
control's functions, see the remote control functional
key chart (I&' page 23).
(") ,-- I
Note: The error message "NOT AVAILABLE"
may appear if you press a key for a function that
is not available.
1 POWER turns the TV on and off. When the TV is
on, the green LED indicator on the TV front will be
illuminated.
2 FREEZE freezes the picture. Press again to restore the
moving picture (1& page 41).
3 SLEEP accesses the sleep timer (1& page 50).
4 PIC SIZE cycles through the picture sizes: Natural,
TheaterWide 1/2/3, Full, 4:3 HD, Native and Dot by Dot
(1& page 39-40).
5 Channel Numbers (0-9, -/100) directly tune channels.
The@button is used to tune digital channels (1& page
38) or to edit the Favorites List (1& page 36).
6 INPUT selects the video input source (1& page 34).
7 CH.AT cycles through programmed channels when no
menu is on-screen (1& page 30).
8 VOL +- adjusts the volume level.
9 FAV BROWSER accesses the Favorites List in the Channel
Brower™ (1& page 35).
10 RECALL displays TV status information (1& page 52).
11 CH RTN returns to the last viewed channel or source
(1& page 38).
12 MUTE reduces or turns off the sound (1& page 43).
13 INFO displays TV status information as well as program
details, when available (1& page 52).
14 ; ~ / ;; ~ While watching TV, these buttons open
the Channel Browser™ and tune to the previous/next
channel in the channel history (1& page 36). (Also see
"Arrow buttons.")
15 Arrow buUons (.AT .... ~ ) When a menu is on-screen,
these buttons select or adjust programming menus. (Also
see; ~ / ; ; ~ . )
16 ENTER activates highlighted items in the main menu
system.
17 MENU accesses the main TV menu system (1& pages 27
and 28).
18 EXIT closes on-screen menus.
19 MODE SELECT switch switches between TV, CABLE!
SAT, AUX 1, and AUX 2 modes (1& page 22). Set to "TV"
to control the TV.
21
Using the remote control to
control your other devices
If you have a non-Toshiba device or a Toshiba device that
the remote control is not preprogrammed to operate, you
must first program the remote control to recognize the
device (if you have not already done so) 24-26).
To use your TV remote control to operate a:
• Cable converter box or satellite receiver, set the
MODE SELECT switch to CABLE/SAT.
• VCR, set the MODE SELECT switch to AUX 1.
• DVD player or HTIB, set the MODE SELECT
switch to AUX 2.
Note: Even after the TV remote control is
programmed, it may not operate certain
features on any other devices. If this happens
and you wish to use those features, you will
need to use the device's original remote control.
Point the remote control
directly at the device.
TaU,.
,
I 22
1 POWER Turns the selected device on and off.
2 Channel Numbers (0-9) Press to directly access
channels (as opposed to (t;) l:£)).
3 +10 Press to directly access DVD chapters higher than
10.
4 TOP MENU Accesses a DVD's top menu.
5 CH. T For channels programmed into the channel
memory 30):
• selects the next higher channel.
T selects the next lower channel.
6 GUIDE Displays the channel guide in the CABLE/SAT
mode.
SET UP Accesses a DVD's setup menu in the AUX
mode.
7 INFO Displays TV status information on-screen.
8 • T .... Press to navigate DVD menus (may not work
on some DVD players).
9 ENTER Required by some satellite receivers and DVD
players to activate certain functions.
10 OVD CLEAR Press to reset the title and chapter number.
11 PLAY Begins playback of a tape or DVD.
12 PAUSE Press during play or record mode to pause the
picture; press again to restart.
13 STOP Stops the tape or DVD.
14 SKIP'" Skips forward to locate later DVD chapters.
15 FF Fast-forwards the tape or DVD. (Press during play
mode to view the picture moving rapidly forward.)
16 SKIP'" Skips back to beginning of current DVD
chapter, or locates previous chapters.
17 REW Rewinds/reverses the tape or DVD. (Press
during play mode to view the picture moving rapidly
backward.)
18 TVNCR To view one program while recording another,
press to select TV mode.
SEARCH selects a specific DVD chapter, title or time.
19 REC Starts tape recording.
20 MODE SElECT switch Set to "TV" to control the TV;
"CABLE/SAT" to control a cable converter box or
satellite receiver; "AUX I" to control aVCR; "AUX 2"
to control a DVD player or HTIB.
Remote Control functional key chart
Note:
• U " =key does not send a signal in that remote control mode.
• ' ~ T V " = key will affect the TV, even though the remote control is in another mode.
• * Not available for your TV
-TV -TV -TV -TV
-TV -TV -TV -TV
FREEZE -TV -TV -TV -TV
Digit 1-9 Digit 1-9 Digit 1-9 Digit 1-9 Digit 1-9
Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0
- (sub CH) - (sub CH) 100 +10
TV/Video select -TV -TV -TV -TV
,
FAVBROWSER
DVD TOP Menu*
Top Menu
Sound mute -TV -TV -TV -TV
Guide* SAT Guide Setup
Volume up/down -TV -TV -TV -TV
Channel Channel Channel Channel
up/down up/down up/down up/down
RECALL -TV -TV -TV -TV
Previous channel
DVD Return
DVD previous menu*
Info Info Display
Select, Enter Enter
Menu
Menu up/down
up/down
Menu left Menu left
.'
Menu right!
Channel Browser™
Menu right Menu right
Menu Action Menu DVDMenu
Exit
Exit DVD Clear
DVD c1ear*
Pause Pause
Play* Play Play
Stop* Stop Stop
Skip REV* Skip REV
Skip FWD* Skip FWD
Rewind* Rewind Rewind
Fast FWD* Fast FWD Fast FWD
TV/vCR DVD search
23 I
SLOWREW*
SLOWFWD*
Angle*
Sub title*
Audio*
Eject*
DVDAngle
DVD Sub title
DVDAudio
DVD Eject
• In addition to POWER, confirm that all necessary
keys on the TV remote control operate your device.
If some keys are not operational, repeat the device
code setup using another code (if other codes
are listed for your device). If, after trying all listed
codes, the necessary keys do not operate your
device, use the device's original remote control.
• Every time you change the batteries, you will need
to reprogram the remote control.
Some newer VCRs respond to either of two codes.
These VCRs have a switch labeled "VCR1NCR2."
If your VCR has this kind of switch and does not
respond to the codes for your VCR brand, set the
switch to the other position ("VCR1"or "VCR2")
and reprogram the remote control.
Note:
I
I •
Your Toshiba TV remote control is preprogrammed
to operate most Toshiba devices. To program your
TV remote control to operate a oon-Toshiba device
(or a Toshiba device that it is not preprogrammed to
operate), follow the steps below. For details on using
the remote control to operate the device, see page 22.
1 In the remote control code table (IrE page 25), find the
code for your device. If more than one code is listed,
try each one separately until you find one that works.
2 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the type of device you are
programming the remote control to operate - CABLE/
SAT (for a cable converter box or satellite receiver), AUX
I (for VCR or TVNCR combo), or AUX 2 (for a DVD
player or HTIB [home theater in a box]).
3 While holding down RE3LL, press the Channel Number
buttons to enter the 3-digit code for your device.
4 To test the code, turn on the device, point the remote
control at it, and press See notes below.
• If the correct code was entered, the device will
turn off.
• If the device does not respond, repeat steps 1-4
using another code.
• If the device does not respond to another code,
you will need to use the remote control that came
with the device.
5 Remember to set the MODE SELECT switch back to
"TV" to control the TV.
6 For future reference, write down the code(s) you used:
..
Programming the remote control
to control your other devices
I 24
--- --- --- --------- -- - - - - - - - - ~ --- ---- ------ --- ----
Remote control codes
Wards 096 RCA DVD=089,
------------_._---------------_._-_._-------- ------------_.__._------_._--_..
Satellite receiver
VCR=083
In some cases you may not be Alphastar
Samsung DVD=090,
038,059
VCR=084
able to operate your device with Chaparral 034 Sanyo DVD=09I,
theTV remote control. Your other
DISH Network 057 VCR=085
device may use a code that is not
Drake 020,040,044,046, Zenith DVD=092,
recognized by the TV remote
050,053 VCR=086
control. If this happens, use the
Echostar 018,041,051
DVD player
device's remote control.
Express Vu 057
Cable converter box
Fujitsu 027 Aiwa 006,015
GE 008,009,013 Apex 016,017
ABC 061,062,063,082,
General 010,011,012,022,
BOSE 097
084, 087, 092,
Instruments 023,031,049
Broksonic 018
096,098
Hitachi 033
Clarion 019
Archer 065,092,097,099
Hughes 033
Classic 020
Cableview 064,094
Hughes Network
Daewoo 021
Century 092
Systems 019
Denon 022,023,024,025
Citizen 090,092,097
Intersat 048
Emerson 026,027
Contee 083,085,086,088,
JaneiI 027
Fisher 028
093,098
JVC 017,057
Funai 027
Diamond 093
Kenwood 029
GE 001,029,030
GE 061,062
Magnavox 060
Go Video 087
Gemini 069,070,094
Optimus 058
GPX 031
Hamlin 093
Pansat 036,052
Hitachi 005, 032, 033, 034,
Hitachi 062,095,096
Primestar 015,042
035
Jasco 097
Proscan 008,009,013
JVC 003,007,036,042,
MotorolaiGU 062,069,071,082,
Radio Shack 022,023,030
088
Kenwood 037
Jerrold 086,089,096, 107
RCA 008,009,013,016
Konka 008,009
Magnavox 072,096
Realistic 030
Magnavox 004,038
Memorex 092,104
Samsung 059
Memorex 039
Multi Canal 090
Sony 014,055
Mintek 040
Novavision 101
Star Choice 057,106
NAD 026
Panasonic 081,083,085
Star Trak 025,026,037,054
Nakamichi 041
Philco 087
STS 024
Norcent 043
Philips 066,067,068,070,
Toshiba 000,001,002,003,
Onkyo 044
072,073,074,075,
004,005,006,007,
Oritron 058
092
020,031,056 Panasonic 010,045,046,047,
Pioneer 076,077
Vniden 021,028,030,032, 048,049,050
Proscan 061,062
035,039,043,045, Philips 004,051
Radio Shack 092,097,099
047,058 Pioneer 052,053,054,055
RCA 064,081
Zenith 027 Proscan 001,056
Realistic 065
TVNCR Combo
Qwestar 057,058
Recoton 102
RCA 001,002,059,089
Samsung 077,090
Action 078 Sampo 060
Scientific Atlanta 063, 078, 079, 080,
GE 059,062 Samsung 061,062,086,090
088,098,101, 105
Goldstar 065
Sansui 073
Sears 095
Panasonic 065
Sanyo 063,091
Signature 062
Precision 078
Sharp 064,067
Signature 2000 096
Quasar 065
Sherwood 074
Sprucer 081,085
Realistic 079
Sony 011,012,065,066,
Starcom 069,082,087,096,
Sony 074
068,069,070
103,104
Toshiba 057
Sylvania 027
Stargate 069,090
Zenith 065
Teac 071
Sylvania 095, 100
Totevision 009,010,065
Technics 072
TeleView 090
DVDNCR Combo
Techwood 075
Texscan 100
Toshiba 000,013,076,077,
Tocom 071,084,085
Go Video DVD=087,
078
U. S. Electronics 087,096,098
VCR=081
Yamaha 079,080,081
United Cable 082
lVC DVD=088,
Zenith 014,082,092
Universal 065,092,097,099, VCR=082 Portable DVD player
102, 103 Aiwa 093
(continued)
25
I
Audiovox 094,095 Lloyds 053,073,079 Sanyo 007,009,016,054,
Panasonic 024,096,099 Logik 061 064,068,071,075,
RCA 098 LXI 010 079,085
VCR
Magnasonic 061,065,078 Scott 008,011,017,028,
Magnavox 026,027,034,044,
030,057,065,072
Admiral 049
057,061,072 Sears 007,010,016,021,
Aiko 019
Marantz 005,006,007,012,
022,023,024,025,
Aiwa 018
014,026,053,067 035,053,057,063,
Akai 003,004,037,038,039, Memorex 007,009,010,016, 064,065,068,071,
058,069
018,034,049,063,
075,079
Audiovox 010
065,066,068,075, Sharp 013,020,031,049,
Bell & Howell 007,068
079 051,060,066
Broksonic 008,017
MGA 020,028,039 Shintom 004,025,032,061
Calix 010
MGN 056 Signature 049
Carver 026
Minolta 024,025,035,063 Signature 2000 075
CCE 019
Mitsubishi 020,024,025,028, Singer 047,061
Citizen 009,010,011,012,
039,043,065 Sony 004,032,033,041,
013,014,015,019,
Montgomery 049 052,058,070,074,
057,073
Ward
076,077,080
Colortyme 005
Motorola 049 STS 035
Craig 009,010,016,061,
MTC 009,046,061 Sylvania 018,026,027,028,
065,079
Multitech 009,012,018 044,072
Curtis Mathes 001,005,009,012,
NEC 005,006,007,012, Symphonic 018,050,051,053,
014,040,048,053,
014,037,043,053,
073,079
056,057
054,067,070 Tandy 007
Daewoo 011,013,015,017,
Nikko 010 Tashiko 010
018,019,057,078
Noblex 009 Tatung 037
Daytron 078
Optimus 010,049,065 Teac 018,029,037
Denon 063 Optonica 031 Technics 036
Dimensia 001,048
Orion 054,057,062,065, Teknika 010,018,065
Electrohome 010,020,065
068,072 Toshiba 000,011,021,023,
Emerson 003,008,010,011,
Panasonic 036,045,046,057, 024, 028, 030,039,
017,018,020,028,
061,072,079 057,074,078,079
039,054,057,062, Pentax 012,024,025,035,
065,068,072
042,053,063 Totevision 009,010,065
Fisher 007,016,021,022, Pentex Research 014
Unitec 073
023,057,064,068, Philco 026,027,063 Unitech 009
070,071,079 Philips 026,031,044,057 Vector Research 005,006,011,012,
Fuji 004,041 Pioneer 006,024,043,055
053
Funai 018,073 Portland 012,013,015
Video Concepts 005,006,011,012,
Garrard 018 Proscan 001,002,048
039,053
GE 001,002,009,040, Proton 061
Wards 009,010,011,016,
042,048,056 Quasar 045
018,020,024,025,
Go Video 056,059,061,081 Radio Shack 010,031,065
031,035,049,051,
Goldstar 005,010,014,054, Radio Shack! 007,009,010,016,
056,065,067 Realistic 018,020,021,022,
056,057,060,065,
Gradiente 018,065 031,049 066,079
Harman Kardon 005 Radix 010
White 073
Hitachi 024,025,035,037, RCA 001,002,003,009, Westinghouse
042,063,070,080 024,025,029,035, XR-1000 018
JBL 076 040,042,045,048, Yamaha 005,006,007,014,
JC Penney 005,006,007,008,
055,056,063,071,
037,053
009,010,023,024,
083
Zenith 004,032,034,041,
025,026,035,056, Realistic 007, 009, 010, 011,
047,069,086
061,063,065 016,018,020,021,
HTIB Jensen 024,025,037,050 022,031,049,051,
lVC 005,006,007,014,
056,060,065,075,
Lasonic 083
037,043,055,062,
079
Panasonic 084
063,068,082 Ricoh 047
Venturer 085
Kenwood 005,006,007,012,
Runco 034
014,037,043,050, Samsung 009,011,038,056,
053, 068, 071 073,084
Kodak 010 Sansui 006,037,043,061
LG 010
I
26
Main menu layout
The tables below and on the next page provide a quick overview of your TV's menu system.
MENU
To open the main menus (illustrated below), press 0 on the remote control or TV control panel.
Icon
Video
Audio
"Jtem
Mode
Picture Settings
Noise Reduction
Game Mode
Theater Settings
Digital Audio Selector
Audio Settings
Option
Sports / Standard / Movie / PC / Preference
[Opens the Picture Settings menu]
[Opens the Noise Reduction menu]
Off / On
[Opens the Theater Settings menul
[Launches the temporary Audio Selector]
[Opens the Audio Settings menu]
Preferences
Locks
Setup
o
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup
CC Selector
Base CC Mode
Digital CC Settings
Input Labeling
Channel Labeling
Menu Language
Channel Browser Setup
REGZA-L1NK Player Control
Enable Rating Blocking
Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block
Input Lock
Control Panel Lock
GameTimer
New PIN Code
Installation
REGZA-L1NK Setup
Sleep Timer
PC Settings
Logo LED
--+
--+
[Opens the Advanced Audio Settings menu]
[Opens the Audio Setup menu-I
[Launches the temporary CC Selector]
Off/CCI /CC2/CC3/CC4/TI /T2/T3/T4
[Opens the Digital CC Setup menu]
[Opens the Input Labeling menu]
[Opens the Channel Labeling menu]
English / Franc;ais / Espanol
[Opens the Channel Browser Setup menu]
[Opens the REGZA-L1NK Player Control]
Off / On
[Opens the Edit Rating Limits menu]
[Opens the Channels block menu]
Off / Video / Video+
Off / On
Off /30 min / 60 min /90 min / 120 min
[Opens the New PIN Code entry screen]
[Opens the Installation menu (1& page 29)]
Enable REGZA-L1NK / TV Auto Input Switch
/ TV Auto Power/ Device Auto Standby / Speaker
Preference
[Opens the Sleep Timer menu]
[Opens the PC Settings menu]
Off/On
27 I
Setup/Installation menu layout
The Installation menu contains the Terrestrial and System Status menus.
I t II t
"· MENU
To open the ns a a IOn menu (Illustrated below), press 0 on the remote contro) or TV control panel, open the
Setup menu, select Installation. and press 8.
lcol1
Terrestrial
System Status
·cz
··ltem"·
Input Configuration
Channel Program
Channel AddlDelete
Channel Tuning Mode
Time Zone
Signal Meter
System Information
IOpens the Input Configuration menu]
[Start] --+ [Scans for new channels on ANT/CABLE]
[Opens the Channel Add/Delete menu]
Standard / Auto / Digital
Pacific / Alaska / Hawaii / Atlantic / Newfoundland /
Eastern / Central/Mountain
[Opens the Signal Meter menu]
[Opens the System Information screen]
Navigating the menu system
You can use the buttons on the remote control or TV
control panel to access and navigate your TV's on-
screen menu system.
MENU
• Press 0 to open the menu system.
. EXIT
• To close a menu JIlstantly, press O.
Note:
• The menu background may sometimes
appear black, depending on the signal
the TV is receiving. This is not a sign of
malfunction.
• The Video sub-menu appears with a black
background, which looks different from other
menus.
• When a menu is open, use the up/down/left/right
arrow buttons ( ........ ~ ) on the remote control
or TV control panel to move in the corresponding
direction in the menu.
• Press @ to save your menu settings or select
a highlighted item. (A highlighted menu item
appears in a different color in the menu.)
• All menus close automatically if you do not make
a selection within 60 seconds. except the signal
meter menu, which closes automatically after
about 5 minutes.
I 28
Setting the Energy Saving Mode TOSHIBA Logo LED
When you first turn on the TV, the Menu Language,
and Energy Saving Mode windows will appear by
default.
To select settings:
1 From the Menu Language selection window,
highlight your preferred language and press 8.
You can select TOSHIBA Logo LED either On or Off.
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Setup menu.
2 Highlight Logo LED and press
3 Press. or ... to select either On or Off and press
8.
Please select a language.
Fram;:ais Espfiol
On
2 Next, the Energy Saving Mode setting window will
appear.
For normal home lise, press to select Home and
press 8.
To use this TV for displaying in a retail showroom.
please select [Retail).
[Home] mode is recommended for normal home
use. (ENERGY STAR® qualified"')
Configuring the antenna input
source for the ANT/CABLE
terminal
To configure the ANT/CABLE input source:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Setup menu.
2 Highlight Installation and press 8.
Off
Done Cancel
Input Configuration
4 Press .... or to select the input source (Cable or
Antenna) for the ANT/CABLE input on the TV.
5 To save your new settings, highlight Done and press
8. To revert to your original settings, highlight
Cancel and press 8.
Setu.P', ,."
.. "
REGZA·lINK Setup
Sleep Timer
PC Settings
Logo LED Off
3 (A new set of Installation menu icons will appear,
as shown below.) Open the Terrestrial menu,
highlight Input Configuration, and press 8.

Ten'lllltrial./ .•... '" .. .. <.

, Channel Program
Channel
Channel Tuning Mode Auto
Time Zone
Signal
61 (JI
Preferences
cc Selector
Base CC Mode
Digital CC Settings
Input Labeling
Channel Labeling
C
I
4:lmi1'!l!!C- J,tl!J HW!·m· i:l,••• :0-_
" Channel Browser Setup • Fran9ais
REGZA·L1NK Player Control Espaiiol
4
EXIT
Press 0 to close the Preferences menu.
Home
Selecting the menu language
You can choose from three different languages
(English, French and Spanish) for the on-screen
display of menus and messages.
To select the menu language:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Preferences menu.
2 Highlight Menu Language and press
3 Press. or ... to select your preferred menu
language and press 8.
29
Programming channels into the
TV's channel memory
4 (A new set of Installation menu icons will
appear, as shown below.) Open the Terrestrial
menu, highlight Channel Program to bring up
the Start and press @ again to begin channel
programming.
~ ICHI
When you press ICHI or ~ on the remote control
or TV control panel, your TV will stop only on the
channels you programmed into the TV's channel
memory.
Follow the steps below to program channels into the
TV's channel memory.
Programming channels automatically
Your TV can automatically detect all active channels
in your area and store them in its memory. After the
channels are programmed automatically, you can
manually add or erase individual channels in the
channel memory.
Sleep Timer
PC Settings
Logo LED Off
Terrestrial
BHml!lD!!IUUIII tIl
Note:
• You must configure the ANT/CABLE input
source before programming channels (VIi
page 29)
• The automatic channel programming process
will erases channels that were previously
programmed into the TV's memory
• To tune the TV to a channel not programmed
in the channel memory, you must use the
Channel Number buttons on the remote
control.
• Programming channels when the ANT/
CABLE input is configured for Cable will take
substantially longer than when the antenna
input is configured for Antenna. This is
normal; however. once channel programming
is finished, you should not have to repeat
the programming process again unless
your Cable TV service lineup changes
significantly
To program channels automatically:
1 Configure the antenna input source, if you have
not already done so (1G'f page 29).
2
MENU
Press 0 and open the Setup menu.
3 Highlight Installation and press @.
I 30
The TV will automatically cycle through all the
antenna channels, and store all active channels
in the channel memory. While the TV is cycling
through the channels, the message "Scanning
channels, please wait" appears (as shown
above).
5
. EXIT
To cancel channel programmJng, press 0 on
the remote control (or highlight Cancel in the on-
screen display and press 8).
When channel programming is finished, press (£I
ICHI . I
or ~ to view the programmed channe s.
Manually adding and deleting
channels in the channel memory
After automatically programming channels into the
channel memory, you can manually add or delete
individual channels.
To add or delete channels in the channel
memory:
1 From the Setup menu, highlight Installation and
press @. A new set of Installation menu icons
will appear.
(continued)
Labeling channels
The maximum number of labels that can be
stored is 128.
To remove channel labels:
1 Open the Channel labeling window.
2 Press QS1 or to select the channel for which
you want to remove the label.
3 Press .. T .... to highlight No label and press
@.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other channels.
5 To save your settings, highlight Done and press
@.
A list of common channel labels (logos) for various
channels (ABC, CBS, etc.) will be programmed into
the TV. You will be able to view and assign these
logos from the Channel labeling window. If the
desired channel label is not provided in the list, you
will be able to manually enter/edit labels using the
software keyboard.
To assign channel labels:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Preferences menu.
2 Highlight Channel labeling and press S.
The Channel labeling window opens.
3 Press QS1 or to select the channel you want to
label.
4 Press .. T .... to highlight the desired channel
label and press S.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for other channels.
6 To save your settings, highlight Done and press
S.
I Custom
". '.-.
1J.1
Pr95sCH uP)pOV/N:to -J
--
",'-CO .. ,
{No Label}
A&E
ABC
ABCFAM
ABCHD
AMAX
Channel Labeling
To remove encrypted channels from the
channel memory:
If an encrypted channel is accidentally added to
the channel list by programming channels, you can
remove the unwanted encrypted (non-viewable)
channel while you are channel surfing. When you
tune into an encrypted channel, the following
message will appear.
To manually add digital subchannels on a
physical channel:
Use the Channel Numbers and the Dash ((!QQ) on
the remote control to enter the channel number (for
example, 56-I).
If the channel is found, the number will be added to
the list and the box will be checked.
If the channel is not found, a message will appear.
To remove a channel from the channel
memory:
Highlight the checked box next to the channel
number you want to remove, and then press @ to
uncheck the box.
To save your new settings:
Highlight Done and press @.
To revert to your original settings:
Highlight Cancel and press S before saving.
To remove all channels from the channel
memory:
Highlight Reset and press @, and then highlight
Done and press S.
Note: A video preview of the currently
highlighted channel is provided to assist you in
adding/deleting channels.
Digital Channel Is Encrypted - Press 1on remote to remove channel
2 Open the Terrestrial menu, highlightChannel
Add/Delete, and then press @.
To add a channel to the channel memory:
Highlight the unchecked box next to the channel
number you want to add, and then press @ to check
the box.
Press m while the message is on the screen to
remove the unnecessary channel from the channel
list.
If the desired channel label is not available from the
list of presets, you can create a custom label.
(continued)
31
To create and assign a custom label:
1 Open the Channel Labeling window.
2 Press (ti;) or Mto select a channel you want to
label.
3 Press .... .. to highlight Custom and press @.
The software keyboard will appear.
Channel Labeling
Setting the HDMITM audio mode
To set the HDMI audio mode:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the AudiO menu.
2 Highlight Audio Setup and press @.
3 Press .... or to select HDMI1 Audio and
then press .... or .. to select the HOMI I audio
mode (Auto, Digital. or Analog). (Auto is the
recommended mode.) See "Connecting an HOMI
or DVI device to the HOMI input" (If:<i'C page 16).
AMC Clear All
ANIMAL Done
Audio Setup
To delete the custom label:
1 Open the Channel Labeling window.
2 Highlight the label to be deleted and press GQQ).
3 Highlight Yes from the deletion confirmation
window and press @.
4 Repeatedly press the corresponding key on the
remote control to highlight the desired character
on the on-screen software keyboard.
5 The highlighted character is entered after you
either press a different key, press" key. or after a
two-second pause.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have entered all
desired text.
7 When finished, press @.
8 New labels will be added to the list in alphabetical
order and marked with an icon I to indicate that
they are custom. Highlight the new custom label
and press @ to assign.
Assigned channel labels will be displayed in the
banner, Channel AddlDelete, Channels Block, and
Channel Browser™.
Chennel Labeling
No
Stereo
English
Dolby Digital
Compressed
Done
When viewing the HOMI I input.
analog audio from the PC Audio input
will be output.
When viewing the HOMI I input.
digital audio from the HOMI input will
be output.
When viewing the HOMl I input, if
digital audio from the HOMI input is
available, it will be output. If not, the
TV will automatically detect and output
analog audio from the PC Audio input.
Reset
Language
Optical Output Format
Dolby Digilal
Dynamic Range Control
MTS
PC Audio
Analog
Digital
Auto
Note: Because the PC and HOMI-1 inputs
share the same set of analog audio inputs, the
PC Audio menu setting influences the HDM/1
Audio menu setting. If PC Audio is set to "No, "
the HDM/ 1 Audio setting changes to "Auto."
If PC Audio is set to "Yes," the HOM/ 1 Audio
setting is set to "Digital" and is grayed out in
the menu. (Also see item 7 on page 12 and
"Setting the PC Audio" on page 49.)
4 To save your settings. highlight Oone and press
@.
Clear All
Done
I Custom
Ai
__:::J!!fIfJ'& -
TLe
TNT
TIMES
TMe
TMCX
TMCXw
TMCw
TNTHD
... 1 TOCDEFG

4 Highlight Done and press @ to save changes,
and go back to the Channel Labeling window.
I 32
Viewing the digital signal meter
You can view the digital signal meter in the ANTI
CABLE digital TV input source only.
To view the digital signal meter:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Setup menu.
2 Highlight Installation and press 8.
3 A new set of Installation menu icons will appear.
Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Signal
Meter, and press 8.
4 Press ... T .... ~ to select the antenna input and
digital channel whose signal you want to check.
Note:
• The physical digital channel number listed in
the Signal Meter screen may not correspond
to a virtual TV channel number Contact your
local broadcasters to obtain the RF channel
numbers for your local digital stations.
• The signal strength does not change between
virtual channels on the same physical
channel
To close the screen and return to the
Terrestrial menu:
Highlight Done and press 8.
To return to normal viewing:
EXIT
Press O.
Setting the time zone
The Time Zone setup will allow you to specify the
correct time zone for your region. This feature will
allow the TV status information to show the correct
time zone information (I@" page 52).
To set the time zone:
1 From the Setup menu, highlight Installation and
press 8. A new set of Installation menu icons
will appear.
2 Highlight Time Zone Setup, and press 8.
3 Press" or 'Y to select the region, highlight
Done, and then press @.
After the time zone has been set, you will be asked to
set the current Daylight Saving Time status.
To set the Daylight Saving Time status:
1 Press .... or ~ to select Yes or No, highlight Done,
and then press 8.
Viewing the system status
To view the system status:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Setup menu.
2 Highlight Installation and press 8.
3 A new set of Installation menu icons wi II appear.
Open the System Status menu, highlight System
Information, and press 8.
4 Press .... ~ to scroll through the menu bar to select
the Sotware Version or Support Information and
view the related information.
Note:
• Sotware Version is for 40RV525R,
40RV52R and 46RV525R.
• Support Information is for 32RV525RZ,
37RV52RZ, 37RV525RZ, 37RV52RZ,
40RV525RZ, 40RV52RZ and 46RV525RZ
To close the screen and return to the
Installation menu:
Highlight DONE and press 8.
To return to normal viewing:
EXIT
Press O.
Reset Factory Defaults
To reset all settings and channels to their
factory default values:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Setup menu.
2 Highlight Installation and press 8. A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear.
3 Open the System Status menu, highlight System
Information. and press 8.
4 Press .... ~ to scroll through the menu bar to select
Factory Defaults.
5 Enter your PIN code (or 0000 if no PIN code has
been set).
6 Highlight Yes and press 8. The TV will turn
off automatically after a few seconds. After the
TV turns off, unplug the TV power cord and then
plug it in again to complete the reset process.
To cancel the reset:
Highlight No and press 8.
33 I
Selecting the video input source
to view
To select the video input source to view:
1 Press ~ ~ on the remote control or TV control
panel.
2 And then either:
a) PressO-7;or
b) Repeatedly press'" T on the remote control
and then press @ to change the input; or
c) Repeatedly press ~ on the remote control
or TV control panel to change the input.
The current signal source displays in the top right
corner of the Input Selection screen.
I(j) ANT/CABLE
o Video 1
6 Video 2
8 ColorStream H01
o ColorStream H02
o HOMI 1 Iim'fa!Illll
o HOMI2
o HOMI 3
Q PC
(j) . Q I CIllD to Select 8 Navigate
Note:
• You can label the video input sources
according to the specific devices you have
connected to the TV ( ~ "Labeling the video
input sources" at right).
• Sources can be "hidden" ( ~ "Labeling the
video input sources" at right).
• "No Video Signal" will appear randomly on the
screen if no signal is received in video input
mode.
• If CEC device is connected to a HOMI input,
the REGZA-LINK icon will appear.
If a REGZA-LINK device with HDMI
switching capability (e.g. Audio Receiver) is
connected to the HDMI input:
Press ~ on the remote or TV control panel
repeatedly to highlight HOMI1, HOMI 2, or HOMI 3.
If the connected CEC device has any connected
devices, a separate device selection popup window
will appear.
Press ~ ~ repeatedly to highlight the desired input
EXIT
source, and then press O.
Note:
• When selecting REGZA-LINK input sources
from the popup window using ~ ~ , some
REGZA-LINK devices may automatically turn
on.
• When selecting input sources using ... ~ ,
you will have to press @ to actually select a
particular device from the popup window.
Labeling the video input sources
You can label each video input source according to
the type of device you connected to each source,
from the following preset list of labels:
• - - (default label)
• Audio Receiver
• Cable
• Compact Disc
• DTV
• DVD
• Game Console
• HDMl Switch (HDMl inputs only)
• Laser Disc
• Satellite/DSS
• VCR
• Video Recorder
• Hide (to hide an unused input in the Input Selection
screen and in the Channel Browser™ Inputs list)
Note: If you select PC in the Input Selection
screen, you can choose only "- -", "Game
Console", or "Hide" as the label.
To label the video input sources:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Preferences menu.
2 Highlight Input Labeling and press @.
I 34
I HOMI 1 - 1
HDMI1 - 2
HDMI1 - 3
Audio Receiver
Player
Recorder
(continued)
3 Press'" or T to highlight the video source you
want to label.
Tuning channels
Input labeling example:
The screen below left shows the default Input Selection
screen (with none of the inputs labeled as a specific
device). The screen below right is an example of how
you could label the inputs if you connected a VCR to
VIDEO I, Cable TV to VIDEO 2, a video recorder to
ColorStream HO I, a OTV set-top box to HOMI I, and
a satellitefDSS set-top box to HOMI 2, and a OVO
player to HOMI 3. Also note that the ColorStream
H02 input is labeled "Hidden", which means that input
will be skipped over when ~ ~ ) is pressed.
4 Press ~ or ~ to select the desired label for that
input source. If a particular input is not used, you
can select Hide as the label, which will cause that
input to be "grayed out" in the Input Selection
screen and skipped over when you press ~ ) on
the remote control.
5 To save the new input labels, highlight Done and
press@.
To revert to the factory default labels, highlight
Reset and press @.
The Favorites Browser allows you to quickly set up a
favorite channels/inputs list that is integrated into the
Channel BrowserI'M.
1
FAV BROWSER .
Press 0 to open the Favontes browser
list.
2 Highlight the channel or input to delete by
pressing :; ~ or (; ~ .
3 Press and hold (100) for 3 seconds. The channell
input will be removed from the Favorites list.
Favorites Browser
To add a favorite channeVinput:
1 Tune to the channel or input.
2
FAV BROWSER
Press and hold 0 for 3 seconds.
Note: Additions are added to the beginning of
the Favorites list on the left side of the Channel
Browser™
To delete a favorite channel/input:
Tuning channels using the
Channel Browser™
The Channel Browser™ provides an easy navigation
interface for all your channels and inputs. This
feature allows you to:
• Navigate the contents of all of your inputs.
• Keep a list of your favorite channels (see
"Favorites Browser," below).
• Keep a history of the last 32 channels or inputs
viewed.
• Quickly surf and tune your recently viewed
channels/inputs from the Channel BrowserI'M
History List (illustrated on the next page).
• Surf via Browse mode (to immediately tune
channels as you highlight them in the Channel
BrowserI'M) or Select mode (to surf over channels
in the Channel BrowserI'M before you select one
to tune).
• Quickly change inputs from the Inputs List.
• Quickly select REGZA-LI K devices from the
REGZA-LINK List.
, ~ . - .
VCR
Cable
o .0 I «m10 select" Navigate
10 ANfiCASlf
o VCR
e Cable
€t Video Recorder
o . "....
o DTV
~ SatellitclDSS
6 DVD
o PC
Input Selection screen
with all inputs labeled
except input 4, which
has been hidden.
Video 1
Video 2
Color Stream HO 1
ColorStream HD 2
HOMI1
HOMI 2
HOMI3
PC
Reset
Input Labeling
(1) • Q I 4Dto Select" Navigale
Ie MHOASI.E
o Video 1
E) Video 2
€t ColorStream HDl
o ColorSlrcam HD2
o HDMl 1
() HDM12
o HDMI3
o PC
Input Selection screen
with no inputs labeled.
(continued)
To clear the input labels:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Preferences menu.
2 Highlight Input Labeling and press @.
3 Highlight IReset and press @.
To set up the Channel Browser™:
1 From the Preferences menu, highlight Channel
Browser Setup and press @.
2 Press'" to highlight Navigation, and then press
~ or ~ to select either Browse Mode or Select
Mode.
35 I
REGZA-L1NK List Off
Reset Done
4 3 2 1
Elements of the ChannelBrowser™
On
On
On
On

History List
ANT/CABLE List
Inputs List
Favorites List
Channel Browser Setup
3 Press T to highlight History List, and then press
.... or to select the setting you preteI': either On,
or Off.
Note: History List will be cleared every time
the TV is powered off.
4 Press T to highlight ANT/CABLE List, and then
press .... or to select On or Off.
5 Press T to highlight Inputs List, and then press
.... or to select On or Off.
6 Press T to highlight Favorites List, then press ....
or to select On or Off.
7 Press T to highlight REGZA-L1NK List, and then
press .... or to select On or Off.
Note: REGZA-LINK List will be automatically
grayed out and set to Off when Enable
REGZA-LiNK is switched to Off. (See 'To
set the REGZA-LINK Setup" on page 51 for
more information)
8 To save your entries, highlight Done and press
@. To return to factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press@.
To open the Channel Browser™:
1 Current list (History, ANT/CABLE, Inputs,
Favorites, or REGZA-lINK)
2 Input type
3 Channel or input currently being viewed
4 Channel or input that is currently
highlighted in the browser
5 Channels stored in the History List
6 Channel labels
To toggle among the available lists:
After opening the Channel Browser
H1
, press. or
T to toggle among History, ANT/CABLE, Inputs,
Favorites, and REGZA-L1NK.
Note:
• The Channel Browser™ opens in History
List by default. Once another list has been
selected, the Channel Browser™ will open in
the last selected list.
• If all lists are turned off, pressing:; <lilli, ;
FAV BROWSER _ .
or 0 Will not display the Channel
Browser™ If Favorites List is turned off,
FAV BROWSER .
o Will have no effect.
• Pressing FAV BROWSER will bring up the Channel
Browser™ Favorites list regardless of the last
selected list in the Channel Browser™
BACK...... NEXT ....
• Press ...... or d:iJ ,.... on the remote control.
.
• Press ...... to surf backward through the prevIOusly
tuned 32 channels in the History list, the channels
in the ANT/ CABLE channel list, the inputs in
the Inputs list, the REGZA-LINK devices in the
REGZA-LINK list, or the favorite channels/inputs
in the Favorites list.
NEXT ....
• Press d:iJ ,.... to surf forward through the channel
History, the ANT/CABLE channel list, the
Inputs list, the REGZA-LINK list, or the favorite
channelslinputs in the Favorites list.
To tune to a channel or input in Browse
mode:
1
BACK NEXT ......
While watching TV, press .... or d:iJ ,.... to
open the Channel Browser™ and surf back to a
previous item or surf forward to the next item in
the list.
In Browse mode, when you stop on an item in the
Channel Browser™, it will be highlighted and
the TV will automatically tune to the channel or
input.
2
--
Press 0 to close the Channel Browser
lM
.
I 36
Setting the Channel Tuning Mode
This feature allows you to choose how tuning will be
handled for analog and digital channels when the TV
is in Antenna mode.
Note: To use this feature, the Input Configuration
must be set to Antenna (1& page 29).
The channel tuning mode has three options.
Both analog and digital channels can
be tuned normally
, .
" .', Description
Standard
Mode'
To tune to a channel or input in Select mode:
1

While watching TV, press jg;) .... or C§J to open the
Channel Browser™ and surf back to a previous item
or forward to the next item in the list.
]n Select mode, when you stop on an item in the
Channel BrowserHt, it will be highlighted but you
must press 8 to tune the TV to the highlighted
item.
2 Press 8 to tune the TV to the highlighted item.
3
..
Press 0 to close the Channel Browser
lM
.
To set the Channel Tuning Mode:
Note: Digital mode will be most useful after
analog channels are shut down by the
government in 2009.
1 From the Setup menu, highlight Installation and
press 8. A new set of Installation menu icons
will appear.
2 Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel
Tuning Mode, and then press and .... to
select your desired mode.
Note:
• The Channel Add/Delete & Channels Block
windows as well as the Channel Browser ANT/
CABLE list will be updated automatically when
you change the mode. Also, the History List will
be cleared, but the Favorites List will be saved.
• Even if the Channel Tuning Mode is set to
Digital, analog channel 3 will still be the
default channel to prevent the initial case
where no digital channels have been found in
prior channel scans. (Channel Add/Delete will
not have anything listed until a scan is done.)
Digital channels will have priority when
manually entering a channel number
using the Channel Number (0-9) on the
remote control, can
still be tuned by r£) / ® ,if available
Only digital channels can be tuned
Auto
(default)
Digital
Clearing channels from the History List:
• Reconfiguring the ANT/CABLE input will clear the
History List.
Note: See page 29 for details on configuring
the antenna input.
• Once 32 channels or inputs are stored in the History
List, the oldest item will be removed from the list
when a new channel or input is tuned.
• Turning off the TV will clear the History List.
Note: Whenever an item is selected that cannot
be tuned (for various reasons), the TV will
automatically tune to the previously viewed
channel or input.
Adding channels and inputs to the History
List:
As a channel or input is tuned, the Channel Browser™
adds it to the History List and displays it on the "right
side" of the Channel Browser™. Previously tuned
channels/inputs are "shifted" to the left, eventually
BACK
moving otf the left side. Press jg;) .... to surf backward
through the previously tuned channels/inputs. Any
channel or input that is tuned repeatedly will not be
repeated in the History List, but instead is moved to
the end of the list on the right side of the Channel
Browser™.
The Channel BrowserTl\! will store the following
channels:
• All channels that are tuned using the numeric buttons
on the remote control.
• All channels that are tuned usi ng r£) or on the
remote control.
Adding and clearing channels and inputs
in the History List
37 I
Tuning to the next programmed
channel
To tune to the next programmed channel:
(4'\ I ~ H I
Press ICHI or ~ on the remote control or TV control
panel.
Note: This feature will not work unless you
program channels into the TV's channel memory
(IG)' page 30).
Tuning to a specific channel
(programmed or unprogrammed)
Tuning analog channels:
Press the Channel Number (0-9) on the remote
control. FOJ·.example, to select channel 125, press I, 2,
5, then@.
Tuning digital channels:
Press the Channel Number (0-9) on the remote
control, followed by the dash (GQQ») button and then
the sub-channel number. For example, to select digital
channel 125-1, press I, 2, 5, -, I, then S.
Note: If a digital channel is not programmed-
either through the automatic channel scan (1&
page 30) or the channel add/delete function (u:?
page 31)-you will have to tune the RF channel
using the Channel Number and dash (C1QQ)) on
the remote control.
Switching between two channels
using Channel Return
The Channel Return feature allows you to switch
between two channels without entering an actual
channel number each time.
1 Select the first channel you want to view.
2 Select a second channel using the Channel
Number buttons (and the dash (GQQ») button if
selecting a digital channel).
3
CH RTN .
Press 0 on the remote control. The prevIous
I
.. E h . CH RTN
channe wIll dIsplay. ae tIme you press 0 ,the
TV will switch back and forth between the last two
channels that were tuned.
CH RTN
Note: If you press 0 from a non-antenna
input, the TV will return to the last-viewed
input.
I 38
Switching between two channels
using SurfLock™
The SurtLock
lM
feature temporarily "memorizes" one
CH RTN
channel to the 0 button. so you can return to that
channel quickly from any other channel by pressing
CH RTN. CH Rm
o .To memorize a channel to the 0 button:
1 Tune the TV to the channel you want to program
. CH RTN
IIlto the 0 button.
2 Press and hold CHOTN for about 2 seconds until
the message "Memorized" appears on-screen.
CH RTN
The channel has been programmed to the 0
button.
3 You can then change channels repeatedly, and
CH RTN .
when you press 0 ,the memOrized channel
will be tuned.
The TV will return to the memorized channel one
. CH RTN
tllne only. Once you press 0 and then change
channels again, the CH RTN memory will be cleared
and the button will function as Channel Return,
by switching back and forth between the last two
channels that are tuned.This feature also works for
external inputs.
Selecting the picture size
You can view many program formats in a variety of
picture sizes-Natural, TheaterWide 1, TheaterWide
2, TheaterWide 3, Full, 4:3 HD, Native, and Dot by Dot
(available in PC Mode Only).
Note: The "picture size" illustrations are
examples only The format of the image (in any
of the picture sizes) will vary depending on the
format of the signal you are currently watching.
Select the picture size that displays the current
program the way that looks best to you.
You can save separate picture size preferences for
each input on your TV.
To select the picture size using the remote
control:
1
PIC SIZE
Press 0 on the remote control.
2 While the Picture Size screen is open, you can do
one of the following to select the desired picture
size:
PIC SIZE
• Repeatedly press 0 .
• Press the corresponding Number button (0-6)
while the Picture Size screen is open.
• Press" or T while the Picture Size screen is
open.
(continued)
To select the picture size using the menus:
1 Select Picture Size in the Theater Settings menu.
2 Press .... or ~ to select the desired picture size
setting.
3 Highlight Done and press 8.
Note: Some of the picture sizes may not be
available depending on the receiving signal
format (those will be "grayed out" in the Picture
Size screen).
j/Pictufe.Size>.' .
TheaterWide 2
(for letter box programs)
loooHOOOI
000 000
The top and bottom edges of the picture may be
hidden*.
Some program formats will display with sidebars
and/or bars at the top and bottom.
Note: If you select one of the TheaterWide®
picture sizes, the top and bottom edges of the
picture (including subtitles or captions) may be
hidden. To view the hidden edges, either scroll
the picture (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only) or try
viewing the program in Full or Natural picture
size.
000
000
• If receiving a squeezed 4:3 format program, the
picture is stretched wider to fill the width of the
screen, but not stretched taller.
• None of the picture is hidden.
4:3 HD
(for 72Dp, 1D8Di, and 1D8Dp program
sources only)
o o o ~ o 0 0
000 000
."t1CIlLIf;.. -I .. "OCUtf a . _
The top and bottom edges are hidden*.
TheaterWide 3
(for letter box programs with
subtitles)
Full
(for 16:9 [48Di, 48Dp] source
programs only)
IOOOHOOO!
000 000
000
000
Using these functions to change the
picture size (i.e., changing the height!
width ratio) for any purpose other than your
private viewing may be prohibited under
the Copyright Laws of the United States
and other countries, and may subject you
to civil and criminal liability.
Natural
1
00
°lq
000
TheaterWide 1
(for 4:3 format programs)
1000HOOOI
000 000
The center of the picture remains close to its original
proportion, but the left and right edges are stretched
wider to fill the screen.
Picture is not distorted from original size.
(con! i nued)
39 I
Native
(for 48Di (HDMI), 48Dp (HDMI), 72Dp,
1D8Di, and 1D8Dp signal programs)
P ( T C l ~ I O 001
tLo..ij 000
• If receiving a 4S0i (HDMl), 4S0p (HDMI), nop,
I080i, or IOSOp signal program, Native mode scales
the video to display the entire picture within the
borders of the screen (i.e. no overscanning).
• This is especially useful for external HD sources
such as DVHS movies, or PC graphics.
Note:
• This mode is supported only for HOMI
(1080p,1080i, 720p, 480p, and 480i), ColorStream
(1080i and 720p), and ANTI CABLE (digital)
inputs (1080p, 1080i, and 720p).
• Depending on the input signals, the border of
the picture may be hidden, displayed in black,
or noisy
Dot by Dot
(for VGA, SVGA, XGA, WXGA, and
SXGA sources only)
The "Dot by Dot" picture is non-scaling display.
Depending on the input signal formats, picture is
displayed with sidebars and/or bars at the top and
bottom. (Example: VGA input source)
To set the scroll settings:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Video menu.
2 Highlight Theater Settings and press 8.
3 In the Picture Size field, select either TheaterWide
2 or TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other
mode).
4 Press T to highlight the Picture Scroll field.
5 Press ..... or ~ to scroll the picture up and down
as needed.
6 To save the new settings, highlight Done and
press 8. To revert to the factory defaults,
highlight Reset and press 8.
Note: When receiving a signal at 480i
resolution, the picture scroll function may have
limited adjustment range.
Using the auto aspect ratio feature
When the auto aspect ratio feature is set to On, the
TV will automatically select the picture size when
one of the following input sources is received:
• A 4S0i, 480p, 720p, I080i digital signal from the
ANT/CABLE input
• A 4S0i signal from the VIDEO 1or VIDEO 2 input
• A 480i signal from the ColorStream HD1, or HD2
input
• A 480i, 480p, 720p, I080i, I080p, or VGA (60Hz)
signal from the HDMI1/2 input
* To view the hidden areas (such as subtitles or
captions), see below "Scrolling the TheaterWide®
picture".
4:3 normal
4:3 letter box
16:9 full
Natural (with sidebars)
TheaterWide 2
Full
Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture
(TheaterWide 2 and 3 only)
You can set separate scroll settings for the TheaterWide 2
and TheaterWide 3 modes for each input.
I 40
Not defined (no The current picture size you
ID-I data or set under "Selecting the
HDMI aspect data) picture size" on page 38.
Note: The auto aspect ratio feature is not
applicable to PC input.
Selecting the picture mode
Adjusting the picture
You can select your desired picture settings from four
different modes, as described below.
To turn on the auto aspect ratio feature:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Video menu.
2 Highlight Theater Settings and press @.
3 In the Auto Aspect Ratio field, select On.
4 To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
@. To revert to the factory defaults. highlight
Reset and press @.
To turn off the auto aspect ratio feature:
Select Off in step 3 above.
Selecting the cinema mode
When you view a DVD (3:2 pulldown processed)
from a DVD player connected to the VIDEO 1. VIDEO
2, ColorStream HD-l, ColorStream HD-2 (component
video), or HDMI inputs on the TV, smoother motion
can be obtained by setting the Cinema Mode to Film.
Mode·
Sports
Standard
Movie
PC
Preference
··fictureQualiij
Bright and dynamic picture (factory
setting)
Standard picture settings (factory
setting)
Lower contrast for darkened room
(factory setting)
Designed for viewing of PC tables
and documents
Your personal preferences
To set the Cinema Mode to Film:
(available for 480i and I080i signals)
Note: PC mode is available for HOMI and PC
inputs only (grayed out for other input sources).
To select the picture mode using the menu
system:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Video menu.
2 Highlight Mode and press 8.
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Video menu.
2 Highlight Theater Settings and press @.
3 In the Cinema Mode field, select Film.
4 To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
@. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight
Reset and press 8.
To set the Cinema Mode to Video:
Select Video in step 3 above.
Using the FREEZE feature
Picture Settings
Noise Reduction
Game Mode
Theater Settings
ON
To use the FREEZE feature:
1
Wh
. . h FREEZE
en vIeWIng t e TV, press 0 to make the
picture a still picture.
2
.. FREEZE
To return to the moving picture, press 0
again (or any other button).
Note: If the TV is left in FREEZE mode for
more than 15 minutes, the FREEZE mode
will automatically be released and the TV will
return to moving picture.
Using the FREEZE function for any purpose
other than your private viewing may be
prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the
United States and other countries, and may
subject you to civil and criminal liability.
3 Press .... or ... to select the picture mode you
prefer and press 8.
Standard
Movie
PC
Preference
Note: The picture mode you select affects
the current input only You can select a
different picture mode for each input.
41
Adjusting the picture quality
You can adjust the picture quality (Contrast,
Backlight, DynaLight
H
" Brightness, Color, Tint, and
Sharpness) to your personal preferences.
Contrast lower higher
Backlight* darker lighter
DynaLight** On/Off On/Off
Brightness darker lighter
Color paler deeper
Tint reddish greenish
Sharpness softer sharper
* Backlight
This feature adjusts the brightness of the
entire screen. When in video mode and no
signal is input, this will automatically be set to
O. (Settings are stored in memory.)
** DynaLight
This function automatically strengthens the
black coloring of dark areas in the video
according to the level of darkness.
To adjust the picture quality:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Video menu.
2 Highlight Picture Settings and press 8.
3 Press. or T to select the picture quality you
want to adjust (Contrast, Backlight, DynaLight,
Brightness, Color, Tint, or Sharpness), and then
press .... or ~ to adjust the setting, as described in
the table above.
4 To save the new settings, highlight Done and
press 8. You can use any of the picture modes
( 1 l 2 l J ~ "Selecting the picture mode," above left) as a
starting point for adjusting the picture settings.
To revert back to the base mode that you began
adjusting the picture settings from, highlight
Reset and press 8.
The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically
saved in the Preference mode (1& "Selecting the
picture mode," above left) until Reset is selected.
I 42
Using the closed caption mode
Base closed captions
The closed caption mode has two options:
• Captions-An on-screen display of the dialogue,
narration, and sound effects of TV programs and
videos that are closed captioned (usually marked
"CC" in program guides).
• Text-An on-screen display of information not
related to the current program, such as weather or
stock data (when provided by individual stations).
To view captions or text:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Preferences menu.
2 Highlight Base CC Mode and press ~ .
3 Press. or T to select the desired closed caption
mode and press 8.
• To view captions:
Highlight CC1, CC2, CC3, or CC4. (CC1 displays
translation of the primary language in your area.)
Giant pandas eat leaves.
Note: If the program or video you selected
is not closed captioned, no captions will
display on-screen.
• To view text:
Highlight T1, T2, T3, or T4.
Note: If text is not available in your area, a
black rectangle may appear on screen. If this
happens, set the Base CC Mode to Off.
• To turn off the closed caption mode:
Select Off in step 3 above.
Note: A closed caption signal may not display
in the following situations.
• When a videotape has been dubbed
• When the signal reception is weak
• When the signal reception is non-standard
Digital CC Settings
You can customize the closed caption display
characteristics by changing the background color,
opacity, text size, type, edge, and color.
Note:
• This feature is available for digital channels
only
• You cannot set the Caption Text and
Background as the same color.
To customize the closed captions:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Preferences menu.
2 Highlight Digital CC Settings and press S.
3 Press. or. to highlight the characteristic you
want to change, and then press ..... or ~ to select
the format for that characteristic (see table below).
4 To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
S. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight
Reset and press S.
Adjusting the audio
Muting the sound
To select closed captions:
change to another analog channel, the closed caption
setting will automatically change back to the current
Base CC Mode setting.
You can also use the CC Selector to select digital
closed caption services (if available). When such
services are not available, the CC Selector presents a
default list of services. If the selected service is not
available, the next best service will be used instead.
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Preferences menu.
2 Highlight CC Selector and press S.
3 Press. or • to select Closed Caption, and then
press ..... or ~ to select the desired service.
4
EXIT
Press o.
Auto, Small, Standard, Large Caption Size
Caption Text
Type
Auto, Default, Mono w. Serif,
Prop. w. Serif, Mono w/o
Serif, Prop. w/o Serif, Casual,
Cursive, Small Capitals
MUTE .
Press 0 on the remote control to partIally reduce (1/2
MUTE) or turn off (MUTE) the sound. Each time you
press MOE, the mute mode will change in the following
order:
You can use the CC Selector to temporarily override
the default analog caption mode (set in Base CC
Mode) for a particular channel. However, once you
Caption Text
Edge
Caption Text
Color
Text Foreground
Opacity
Background
Color
Text Background
Opacity
Caption Text
Edge Color
CC Selector
Auto, None, Raised,
Depressed, Uniform, Left
Drop Shadow, Right Drop
shadow
Auto, Black, White, Red,
Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta,
Cyan
Auto, Transparent,
Translucent, Flashing, Solid
Auto, Black, White, Red,
Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta,
Cyan
Auto, Transparent,
Translucent, Flashing, Solid
Auto, Black, White, Red,
Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta,
Cyan
C 1/2 Mute --+ Mute --+ Volume - - + ~
If the closed caption mode is set to Off when you
select "MUTE" mode, the closed caption feature is
automatically activated if the TV program is Closed
Captioned. To mute the audio without automatically
activating the closed caption feature, use ~ to
set the volume to O. See "Using the closed caption
mode" (1& page 42) for more information on closed
caption modes.
Using the digital audio selector
You can use the Digital Audio Selector to
conveniently switch between audio tracks on a digital
channel (for those channels that have multiple audio
tracks). This temporarily overrides the audio rrack
chosen by the language option under Audio Setup (1&
"Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts" on page 44).
To use the digital audio selector:
1
MENU •
Press 0 and open the AudiO menu.
(continued)
43 I
2 Highlight Digital Audio Selector and press @.
Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup
3 Press" or ~ to select Audio. and then press ~
or ~ to select the desired service.
4
EXIT
Press o.
Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts
The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature allows
you to output high-fidelity stereo sound. MTS
also can transmit a second audio program (SAP)
containing a second language. music. or other audio
information (when provided by individual stations).
When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast. the
word "STEREO" or "SAP" appears on-screen when
REOLL is pressed. The MTS feature is only available
for analog signals on the ANT/CABLE input.
To listen to stereo sound:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Audio menu.
2 Highlight Audio Setup and press @.
3 In the MTS field. select Stereo.
4 To save the new settings. highlight Done and
press@.
To reset the settings to the factory defaults.
highlight Reset and press @.
Note:
• You can typically leave the TV in Stereo
mode because it will automatically output
the type of sound being broadcast (stereo
or monaural).
• If the stereo sound is noisy, select Mono to
reduce the noise.
To listen to an alternate language on an
ATSC digital station (if available):
Highlight the Language field in step 3 above. and
then press ~ or ~ to select the language you prefer.
To listen to a second audio program on an
analog station (if available):
Select SAP in step 3 above.
Note:
• A second audio program (SAP) can be heard
only on those TV stations that offer it. For
example, a station might broadcast another
44
language as a second audio program. If you
have SAP on, you will see the current program
on the screen but hear the other language
instead of the programs normal audio.
• If you have SAP on and the station you are
watching is not broadcasting a second audio
program, the station s normal audio will be
output. However, occasionally there is no
sound at all in SAP mode. If this happens, set
the MTS feature to Stereo mode.
Adjusting the audio quality
You can adjust the audio quality by adjusting the
bass. treble. and balance.
To adjust the audio quality:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Audio menu.
2 Highlight Audio Settings and press @.
3 Press ~ or .. to highlight the item you want to
adjust (Bass. Treble. or Balance).
4 Press ~ or ~ to adjust the level.
• ~ makes the bass or treble weaker or
increases the balance in the left channel
(depending on the item selected).
• ~ makes the bass or treble stronger or
increases the balance in the right channel
(depending on the item selected)
5 To save the new settings. highlight Done and press
@. To reset the settings to the factory defaults.
highlight Reset and press @.
Selecting the optical audio output
format
You can use this feature to select the optical audio
output format when you connect a Dolby Digital
decoder or other digital audio system to the Optical
Audio Out terminal on the TV (see "Connecting a
digital audio system" on page 18).
To select the optical audio output format:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Audio menu.
2 Highlight Audio Setup and press @.
3 In the Optical Output Format field. select either
Dolby Digital or PCM. depending on your device.
4 To save the new settings. highlight Done and press
@. To revert to the factory defaults. highlight
Reset and press 8.
Using the Dolby® Digital Dynamic
Range Control feature
This dynamic range control feature causes the ATSC
dynamic range to be further compressed, allowing
you to switch from ATSC to analog broadcasts at the
same dynamic range.
To use the Dolby Digital Dynamic Range
Control:
PIN code has not been stored. Press the Channel
Number buttons to enter a new four-digit code.
enter the code a second time to confirm, and
press 8.
Lock System
Pleaseenw a4 digit PIN code
- ~ § ~
Confirm PIN code
1
MENU •
Press 0 and open the Audio menu.
2 Highlight Audio Setup and press 8.
3 In the Dolby Digital Dynamic Range Control field,
select Compressed. When Standard is selected,
the audio is output with minimal compression.
4 To save the new settings, highlight Done and
press 8.
To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press 8.
Note:
• This item will be grayed out for NTSC signals,
Video, ColorStream, and PC inputs
• The Dolby Digital Dynamic Range Control will
function in relation to Optical Output Format
(PCM mode).
Cancel Done
• The locks/Active screen appears if the PIN code is
already stored. Use the Number buttons to enter your
four-digit code and press 8.
If the wrong PIN code is entered, the message
"Incorrect PI N code, please try again!" appears.
Highlight Retry and press 8. Enter the code again
and press 8.
When the COlTect PIN code is entered, the locks menu
opens.
If you cannot remember your PIN code
While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press
RECALL f . . h' - d Th PIN d .
o our tImes WIt III bve secon s. e co e wIll
be cleared and you can enter a new PIN code.
MENU .. •
Press 0 and highlIght the locks menu icon.
Press'" to display the PIN code entering screen.
Enter your four-digit PIN code and press 8.
Press'" to highlight New PIN Code and press 8.
Press the Number buttons to enter a new four-
digit code. Reenter the PIN code to confirm it.
6 Press 8. The new PIN code is now active.
Changing your PIN code
1
2
3
4
5
The Locks menu includes the Enable Rating
Blocking, Edit Rating Limits, Channels Block, Input
Lock, Front (control) Panel Lock. and New PIN Code
features. You can use these features after entering the
correct PIN code.
Entering the PIN code
Using the Locks menu
1 Press M ~ U and highlight the Locks menu icon.
Locks
Enable Rating Blocking Off
Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block
Input Lock Off
Control F'anel Lock Off
GameTimer Off
New PIN Code
2 Press"', which displays the PIN code entry
screen.
Blocking TV programs and movies
by rating (V-Chip)
Some TV programs and movies include signals that
classify the content of the program (violence. sex,
dialog. language). The V-Chip feature in this TV
detects the signals and blocks the programs according
to the ratings you select. (For rating descriptions, see
the tables on the next page.)
• The Lock System screen (below) appears if a
45 I
To block and unblock TV programs and
movies:
1 Press Mt)'U and highlight the locks menu icon.
2 Press T to display the PIN code entering screen.
3 Enter your four-digit PIN code and press 8.
4 Press T to highlight Enable Rating Blocking.
5 Press ~ and T to select On, and then press 8.
Channels Block
Input Lock Off
Control Panel Lock Oft
GameTimer Off
New PIN Code
6 Press T to highlight Edit Rating limits and press
8. The Edit Rating limits screen appears.
7 Press. T .... ~ and then press 8 to select the
level of blocking you prefer. A box with an "X"
is a rating that will be blocked. As you highlight
a rating, a definition for the rating appears at the
bottom of the screen.
a When done selecting the ratings you want to
block, highlight Done and press 8.
Note: Above selection of blocking level is for
U. S V-Chip system. For Canada rating, you can
highlight the "Canada RS" then press 8, another
"Canadian Rating Menu" screen will appear.
Downloading an additional rating
system for blocking TV programs and
movies
In the future, an additional rating system may become
available for use in selectively blocking programs.
Note: The currently tuned station must be
receiving a digital signal before an additional
rating system can be downloaded.
I 46
To download the additional rating system
(if available):
1 Press Mt)'U and highlight the locks menu icon.
2 Press T to display the PIN code entering screen.
3 Enter your four-digit PIN code and press 8.
4 Press T to highlight Enable Rating Blocking.
5 Press ~ and T to select On, and press 8.
6 Press T to highlight Edit Rating limits and press
8. The Edit Rating limits screen appears.
7 Highlight AU RS and press 8. The Edit Alternate
Ratings screen will appear.
Note:
• The Alt RS button will only be available
if an additional rating system is currently
available.
• It may take several minutes for the TV to
download the additional rating system.
• The information displayed in the Alternate
Ratings screen will depend on the
configuration of the additional rating
system available at the time of download.
a Press. T .... ~ and then press 8 to select the
level of blocking you prefer. A box with an "X"
is a rating that will be blocked.
9 When you are finished selecting the ratings you
want to block, highlight Done and press 8.
1DIn the Edit Rating limits screen, highlight Done
and press 8.
Note:
• The additional rating system can only be
downloaded one time. You will not be able to
download any updates to the rating system
should such updates become available.
• The additional rating system is not designed,
transmitted, or controlled by the TV or
Toshiba, nor is the availability of an additional
rating system determined or controlled by
Toshiba. Similarly, the rating of programs in
an additional rating system is not determined,
transmitted, or controlled by the TV or Toshiba.
• The additional rating system is an evolving
technology; therefore, availability, content, and
format may vary
Independent rating system for movies
:;;;tf:'
X X-rated (For adults only)
Independent rating system for broadcasters


Mature Audience Only (This
program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and
TV-MA
therefore may be unsuitable for
children under 17)
l) Crude or indecent language S)
Explicit sexual activity V) Graphic
violence
Parents Strongly Cautioned (This
program contains some material
that many parents would find
unsuitable for children under 14
TV-14 years of age,)
D) Intensely suggestive dialog
l) Strong, coarse language
S) Intense sexual situations V)
Intense violence
Parental Guidance Suggested
(This program contains material
parents may find unsuitable for
TV-PG
younger children,)
D) Some suggestive dialog L)
Infrequent coarse language
S) Some sexual situations V)
Moderate violence
General Audience (Most parents
TV-G would find this program suitable
for all ages,)
Directed to Older Children (This
program is designed for children
TV-Y7, age 7 and above, Note: Programs
TV- in which fantasy violence may be
Y7FV more intense or more combative
than other programs in this
category are designated TV-Y7FV)
All Children (This program is
TV-Y designed to be appropriate for all
children,)
OH"
Off
OH GameTimer
New PIN Code
"-::".,,-«- :,.,
.•,•.
; Input Lock
.; Panel .
With the Channels Block feature, you can block
specific channels. You will not be able to tune
blocked channels unless you unlock them.
To block channels:
Blocking channels
Note:
• If you place an "X" in the box next to "
'None'Rated, " programs rated "None" will
be blocked; however, programs that do not
provide any rating information will not be
blocked
• To display the rating of the program you are
. RECALL
watchmg, press 0 on the remote control. If
it is rated "None, " the word "NONE" appears
in the RECALL screen (as shown below right).
If rating information is not provided, no rating
will appear in the RECALL screen.
Parental Guidance Suggested
PG (Some material may not be
suitable for children)
G
General Audience (Appropriate
for all ages)
1 Press MOU and highlight the locks menu icon.
2 Press T to display the PIN code entering screen.
3 Enter your four-digit PIN code and press @
45).
4 Press T to highlight Channels Block and then
press @. A list of the channels available for that
input will be displayed along with the call letters
for each channel, if available.
Not intended for anyone 17 and
under
Restricted (Under 17 requires
accompanying parent or adult)
R
NC-17
PG-13
Parents Strongly Cautioned (Some
material may be inappropriate for
children under 13)
5 Press'" T to highlight the channel you want to
block and press @, which puts an "X" in the
box next to that channel.
47 I
To unblock individual channels:
6 Repeat step 5 for other channels you want to
block.
7 Highlight Done and press 8.
and channels 3 and 4. You will not be able to view the
input sources or channels until you unlock the inputs.
To lock/unlock the video inputs:
1 From the Locks menu, Press T to display the
PIN code entering screen.
2 Enter your four-digit PIN code and press 8.
3 Press T to highlight Input Lock and press ~ .
4 Press'" or T to select the level of video input
locking you prefer, as described below.
Channels Block
AD
o
E:l
E:l 4
o 5
E:l
E:l
o
EI
'" 0 10
Allow All
Block All
Cancel
~ - ~ ~ ~
Mode
Video
Description··
Locks VIDEO I, VIDEO 2.
Co!orStream HDI/HD2, HDMI I,
HDMI 2, HDMI 3, and Pc.
In step 5 above. press'" T to highlight the channel
you want to unblock, press 8 to remove the "X"
from the box, highlight Done and press 8.
To block all channels at once:
Highlight Block All in step 5 on previous page and
then highlight Done and press 8.
Video+
Ofr
Locks VIDEO I, VIDEO 2.
ColorStream HD I/HD2. HDMI I.
HDMI 2. HDMI 3. PC and channels 3
and 4.
• Select Video+ if you play video
tapes via an ANT/CABLE input.
Unlocks all video inputs and channels
3 and 4.
To unblock all locked channels at once:
Highlight Allow All in step 5 on previous page and
then highlight Done and press 8.
Unlocking programs temporarily
If you try to tune the TV to a program that exceeds
the rating limits you set. the TV will enter program
lock mode and the following message will appear on-
screen:
This program exceeds the rating limit you set
Push 'MUTE' to enter PIN
You can either temporarily unlock the program or
select an unlocked program to watch.
To temporarily unlock the program:
1
MUTE
Press o.
2 Enter your four-digit PIN code and press 8. Ir
the correct code is entered, the program lock mode
is released and the normal picture appears. All
locking is disabled until the TV is turned otT, and
will be enabled when the TV is turned on again.
Using the input lock feature
You can use the Input Lock feature to lock the
video inputs (VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, ColorStream HD-1,
ColorStream HD-2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 and PC)
I 48
5 Press 8.
Using the GameTimer®
You can use the GameTimer to set a time limit for
playing a video game (30-120 minutes). When the
GameTimer expires, the TV enters Input Lock mode
and locks out the input source for the video game
device.
To set the GameTimer®:
1 From the Locks menu, press T to display the
PIN code entering screen.
2 Enter your four-digit PIN code and press 8.
3 Press T to highlight GameTimer and press ~ .
4 Press'" or T to select the length of time until
the Input Lock is activated (30,60. 90, or 120
minutes) and press 8.
To cancel the GameTimer®:
Select Off in step 4 above.
To deactivate the Input Lock once the
GameTimer® has activated it:
Set the Input Lock to Off (I&' "Using the input lock
feature" as described above).
Note:
• A message will appear when 10 minutes,
3 minutes, and 1 minute remain on the
GameTimer
• If the TV loses power with time remaining on the
GameTimer, when power is restored the TV will
enter Input Lock mode (as if the GameTimer
had been activated) and you will have to
deactivate the Input Lock (as described
above).
picture are cut off, readjust the Horizontal Position
and Vertical Position. If the picture is affected by
interference, readjust the Clock Phase and Sampling
Clock.
To adjust the PC settings:
1 Repeatedly press to select PC input mode
"Selecting the video input source to view"
page 34).
2
MENU
Press 0 and open the Setup menu.
3 Highlight PC Settings and press @.
Setup
Installation
o
--0 •
o
o
o Vertical Position
Clock Phase
Sampling Clock
Auto Adjust
PC Settings
Note: If a PC is not connected or there is no
pc input signal, this feature will be grayed
out in the Setup menu
4 Press A or T to highlight the item you want to
adjust.
5 Press ..... or to make the appropriate
adjustments.
Using the control panel lock feature
You can lock the control panel to prevent your
settings from being changed accidentally (by
children, for example). When the control panel lock
is On, none of the controls on the TV control panel
will operate except POWER.
To lock the control panel:
1
MENU .. L k .
Press 0 and hIghlight the OC S menu Icon.
2 Press T to display the PIN code entering screen.
3 Enter your four-digit PIN code and press @.
4 Press T to highlight Control Panel Lock.
5 Press and A or T to highlight On and press
@. When the control panel is locked and any
button on the control panel (except POWER)
is pressed, the message "NOT AVAILABLE"
appears.
Reset Done
Note: The screen is disrupted momentarily
when adjusting the PC settings. This is not a
sign of malfunction.
Locks
Enable Rating Blocking Off
Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block
Input Lock Off
Off
GameTimer Off
New PIN Code
To unlock the control panel:
Highlight Off in step 5 above, or press and hold the
VOLUME - button on the TV control panel for about
10 seconds until the volume icon appears.
Horizontal
Position
Vertical
Position
Description
Moves the picture left/right.
The adjustment range is within ±50 from
center. *
Moves the picture up/down.
The adjustment range is within ± I0 from
center.':'
Using the PC settings feature
You can view an image from a PC on the TV screen.
When a PC is connected to the TV's PC IN
terminal, you can use the PC Settings feature to
make adjustments to the image. If the edges of the
Clock
Phase
Hel ps to reduce noise and sharpen the
picture.
The adjustment range is within ± 16 from
center. '::
(continued)
49 I
To set the PC Audio:
Setting the sleep timer
Setting the PC Audio
.--.'-... -
'-.? - - ~ < ~ -
With your TV's remote control, or using the REGZA-
LINK Player Control menu, you can control the
connected REGZA-L1NK playback device you are
watching.
Available remote control key functions:
Before using the following key functions, first set the
MODE SELECT switch on the remote control to TV.
This is a new feature that uses CEC technology
and allows you to control Toshiba REGZA-LlNK
compatible devices from the TV remote via HDMI
connection (1& page 17).
When the Enable REGZA-LlNK in the REGZA-
LlNK setup menu (o::w page 51) is sel to On, the
following REGZA-L1NK functions will be enabled.
REGZA-LlNK@ playback device (DVD
player, etc.) control
Note: When a power failure occurs, the
sleep timer setting may be cleared.
To display the remaining sleep time:
SLEEP
Press 0 .
Note: A message will display on-screen when
there is one minute remaining on the sleep timer.
To cancel the sleep timer:
R ell
SLEEP.\. . .
epeate y press 0 untl It IS set to () minute.
Using REGZA-LlNK@
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Setup menu.
2 Highlight Sleep Timer and press @.
3 Press the Number buttons to enter the lenglh of
time in la-minute increments.
4 Highlight Done and press @.
Highlight this item then press @
to gel an optimum adjustment
automaticall y.
Helps 10 reduce noise and minimize
periodic vertical stripes on the screen.
The adjustment range is within ± Ia from
center.*
Auto
Adjust
Sampling
Clock
Note: Because the PC and HOM1- 1 inputs
share the same set of analog audio inputs,
the PC Audio menu setting influences the
HDM/1 Audio menu setting. If PC Audio
is set to "No, " the HDM/ 1 Audio setting
changes to "Auto. " If PC Audio is set to
"Yes, " the HDM/ 1 Audio setting is set to
"Digital" and is grayed out in the menu.
(Also see item 7 on page 12 and "Setting the
HOMITM Audio mode" on page 32.)
* The default settings may vary depending on
the input signal format.
This function allows you to output or mute Ihe sound
from your PC when connecting using the PC IN
terminal and an analog RGB cable. (1& page 19)
1
MENU •
Press 0 and open the AudIO menu.
2 Highlight Audio Setup and press @.
3 Press'& or T 10 select PC Audio anel then press
~ or ~ to select No or Yes.
Yes: When viewing the PC input, the audio from
the PC Audio inpul can be heard.
No: When viewing the PC input, there will be no
audio.
You can set the sleep timer to turn off the TV after a
set length of time (maximum of 180 minutes).
To set the sleep timer using the remote control:
SLEEP
Press 0 on the remote control to set the l e n ~ h of
time until the TV turns otT. Repeatedly press S OEP
to increase the time in la-minute increments, or
press .& or T to increase or decrease the time in
la-minute increments, to a maximum of 180 minutes.
PLAY
CB
STOP
m
PAUSE/STEP
@!!!)
SKIP
~
SKIP
~
Begins playback.
Stops playback.
Pauses the picture during play or record
mode.
Skips forward.
Skips backward.
To set the sleep timer using the on-screen
menus:
FF
(ffi
REW
@
Fast-forwards.
Rewinds/reverses.
I 50
... T .... ~ Navigate contents menu, etc.
@ Enters contents menu, etc.
VOLUME and MUTE controls of Audio
Receiver
EXIT
o Returns to the previous menu.
Note: These functions depend on the devices
connected
REGZA-LINK® Player Control menu
functions:
1
MENU
Press 0 and open the Preferences menu.
2 Highlight REGZA-L1NK Player Control and press @.
01
Preferences
CC Selector
Base CC Mode Off
Digital CC Sellings
Input Labeling
,Channel Labeling
Menu Language English
Channel Browser Setup
~ ' _ ~ ' ' W -
3 Press'" or T to select the item you want to
control and press @.
With your TV's remote control, you can adjust or
mute the sound volume of the Audio Receiver, First,
set the MODE SELECT switch on the remote control
to TV,
•(vW ~ adjust the volume level.
MUTE
• 0 turns off the sound.
Note:
• To use this function:
- Set Speaker Preference to Audio Receiver in
the REGZA-LiNK Setup menu
- Confirm that a connected REGZA-LINK device
(such as OVO player, etc) is selected for the
Audio Receiver input source,
• You can also use this function when the audio
receiver is connected to the TV's DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT terminal (not HOMI connection),
In this case, select a digital audio input mode
on the Audio Receiver
• These functions depend on the device
connected
Other REGZA-LlNK@ functions
If a REGZA-LINK device with HDMI switching
capability (e.g. Audio Receiver) is connected to
the HDMI input, you can select another REGZA-
LINK device that is connected to the master HDMI
device using the TV's INPUT button, See page 34 for
details,
Note:
• These functions depend on the devices that are
connected.
• The REGZA-L1NK Player Control item will be
grayed out in the following conditions:
-A non-HOMI input is currently selected
- The Enable REGIA-LINK item is set to Off,
- The connected GEG device is not a
playback or recording device.
REGZA-LlNK@ input source selection
When the Enable REGZA-L1NK and each item in the
REGZA-liNK Setup menu are set to On, the following
functions will be enabled,
If the TV is turned otf the TV will
send a message to turn off all of the
REGZA-LINK devices connected to
the TV.
If a connected HDMI device starts
playing video or audio, the TV
will automatically switch to the
appropriate HDMI input.
From this item, you can set your
audio output preference to the
TV speakers or the audio receiver
speakers. When this item is set to
Audio Receiver, the TV remote
can be used to adjust or mute the
volume of the audio. This item will
be grayed out unless a REGZA-
LINK compatible audio receiver is
connected,
If a REGZA-L1NK device is turned
on, the TV turns on automatically.
Speaker
Preference
TV Auto
Power
Device Auto
Standby
TV Auto
Input Switch
Accesses the top menu of a DVD.
Accesses the menu of a DVD.
Turns the select device on and off.
Accesses the contents list when you press
@. At this time, the REGZA·L1NK Player
Control menu will disappear,
Menu
Power
Contents
Menu
Top Menu
(continued)
51
/ALB You"g $ xxx... 9:00pm, 11:llOpm E$T
:todaV'!!ltijt:1rt;..-anMfI.
_.
'.. t··t1iW.,.
. .
..;. .
Note: The location of the banner can be moved
to the top or bottom of the screen by pressing ...
or T while the RECALL or INFO display is on-
screen.
The TV will automatically turn itself off after
approximately 15 minutes if it is tuned to a vacant
channel or a station that completes its broadcast for the
day. This feature functions in ANT/CABLE mode only.
To close the RECALL screen:
RECALL .
Press 0 agalIl.
Understanding the auto power off
feature
To display TV status information using INFO:
INFO
Press 0 on the remote control.
The following additional information will display for
off air digital channels (if appl icable):
• Title
• Duration
• Detailed description
Displaying TV status information
Note: When you tum on the Audio Receiver,
change its input source, or adjust the sound
volume, the sound will be output from the audio
receiver's speakers even if TV Speakers has
been selected. Tum the TV off and on again to
output the sound from the TV speakers.
To set the REGZA-LINK® Setup:
1 From the Setup menu, highlight REGZA-L1NK
Setup and press 8.
2 Press'" or T to highlight Enable REGZA-L1NK.
3 Press'" or ~ to select On.
Note: If you select Enable REGIA-LINK Off, the
other items will be grayed out.
4 Press'" or T to highlight the REGZA-L1NK Setup
item you want to use, and press'" or ~ to select
On or desired mode.
• TV Auto Input Switch: On/On'
• TV Auto Power: On/Off
• Device Auto Standby: On/Ott'
• Speaker Preference: TV SpeakerslAudio Receiver
5 To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
8. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight
Reset and press 8.
To display TV status information using
RECALL:
RECALL
Press 0 on the remote control.
The following information will display (if applicable):
• Current input (ANT/CABLE, VIDEO 1, etc.)
• If ANT/CABLE is the current input, either "CABLE"
(for cable TV) or "ANT' (for over-the-air broadcasts).
• Channel number (if in ANT/CABLE mode)
• Channel label (if set)
• Digital signal strength indicator (bar graph in lower
right corner of box; for ATSC signal only)
• Stereo, Mono or SAP audio status (when HDMI input
mode, Dolby Digital or PCM)
• Video resolution
• Aspect ratio of incoming video signal (4:3 or 16:9)
• V-Chip rating status
• Game Timer (if set)
1_1-,!iilli1i_.""'.NMlII II' I
Understanding the last mode
memory feature
If the power is cut off while you are viewing the
TV, the Last Mode Memory feature automatically
turns on the TV when the power is resupplied.
Note: If it's possible, and you will be away
from the TV for an extended period of time you
should unplug the power cord.
52
Using the advanced picture
settings features
Using dynamic contrast
When dynamic contrast is set to On, the TV will
detect changes in the picture quality that affect
the appearance of your contrast settings and then
automatically adjust the video.
To select dynamic contrast preferences:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Video menu.
2 Highlight Picture Settings and press @.
4 To save the new settings, highlight Done and
press S.
To revert the factory defaults. highlight Reset
and press S.
Note: If you select one of the factory-set
picture modes (Sports, Standard, Movie
or PC) and then change the static gamma
setting, the picture mode automatically
changes to Preference.
Selecting the color temperature
You can change the quality of the picture by selecting
from three preset color temperatures (Cool, Medium,
and Warm), as described below.
reddish
neutral
blueish
Picture Quality
Warm
Medium
Cool
Mode
01
Off Game Mode
Theater Settings
Video.
Mode Sports

Noise l1eduction
In the Color Temperature field, press'" or to
select the mode you prefer (Cool, Medium, or Warm).
Press .... or T to select either BDrive or GDrive,
and then press'" or to adjust the settings.
• B Drive: makes the picture blueish.
• G Drive: makes the picture greenish.
Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press
S.
4 Highlight Color Temperature and press S.
5
6
To select the color temperature:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Video menu.
2 Highlight Picture Settings and press S.
3
3 Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press @.
4 [n the Dynamic Contrast field, select either Off or On.
5 To save the new settings, highlight Done and
press@.
To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press 18.
Note: If you select one of the factory-set
picture modes (Sports, Standard, Movie, or
PC) and then change the dynamic contrast
setting, the picture mode automatically
changes to Preference.
Using the static gamma feature
The static gamma feature allows you to adjust the
levels of black in the picture.
To adjust the static gamma settings:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Video menu.
2 Highlight Picture Settings and press S.
3 Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press S.
• In the Static Gamma field, press'" or to
adjust the static gamma.
The adjustment range is within ±5 from center.
• If the setting is moved in the minus direction,
the detail of black colors wi II be decreased.
• If the setting is moved in the plus direction, the
detail of black colors will be increased.
Note: The B Drive and G Drive settings
are connected to the Color Temperature
settings and will change based on which
setting is selected in step 5 above.
7 To save the new settings, highlight Done and
pressS.
To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press@.
Note: If you select one of the factory-set
picture modes (Sports, Standard, Movie, or
PC) and then change the color temperature
mode, the picture mode automatically
changes to Preference.
53 I
Using CableClear® digital noise
reduction
The CableClear@ digital noise reduction feature
allows you to reduce visible interference in your
TV picture. This may be useful when receiving a
broadcast with a weak signal (especially a Cable
channel) or playing a noisy video cassette or disc.
To change the CableClear settings:
1 Press MOU and open the Video menu, highlight
Noise Reduction and press 8.
2 In the CableClear field, select your desired setting.
Note:
• If the current input is ANT/CABLE, VIDEO
1, or VIDEO 2, the menu will display the
text "CableClear. " The available selections
are Off, Low, Middle, and High.
• If the current input is ColorStream HD1,
ColorStream HD2, HDMI 1, HDMI2
or HDMI 3, the menu will display the
text "ONR. " The available selections
are Off, Low, Middle, and High. Low,
Middle, and High will reduce the noise in
varying degrees, from lowest to highest,
respectively
3 To save the new settings, highlight Done and
press 8.
To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press @.
Using MPEG noise reduction
The MPEG noise reduction feature allows you
to reduce visible interference caused by MPEG
compression. Choices for MPEG noise reduction
are Off, Low, Middle, and High. Off is automatically
selected when this feature is disabled ("grayed out").
To select the MPEG noise reduction level:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Video menu.
2 Highlight Noise Reduction and press @.
3 Press A or ... to highlight the MPEG Noise
Reduction field, and then press .... or ~ to select
either Off, Low, Middle or High.
4 To save the new settings, highlight Done and
press@.
To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press@.
I 54
Using the Game Mode feature
You can use the Game Mode feature for shorter
frame delays when playing a video game requiring
split-second timing between the on-screen display
and input from the controller (such as music creation
and high-action games).
This feature is more effective for 480i and I080i input
signals.
Note: To use the Game Mode feature, the
current video input must be Video 1, Video 2,
ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, HDMI
1, HDMI2 or HDMI3. The Game Mode cannot
be turned on when any other video input is
selected.
To turn on Game Mode:
1
MENU .
Press 0 and open the Video menu.
2 Press A or ... to highlight the Game Mode and
then press ~ .
3 Press A or ... to select On and then press @.
To turn off Game Mode:
Select Off in step 2 above, change the video input, or
turn the TV off and then on again.
Note: You can change the video input by
pressing Q ~ on the remote control ( ~ page
34).
Using the advanced audio
settings features
Using the QSound® sound feature
aSound@ is the original name for a positional three-
dimensional (30) sound processing algorithm from
QSound Labs that creates 3D audio effects from
multiple monophonic sources and sums the outputs
to two channels for presentation over regular stereo
speakers.
To adjust the QSound® settings:
1 Put the TV in STEREO mode (Il@f" "Selecting
stereo/SAP broadcasts" on page 42).
2
MENU •
Press 0 and open the Audio menu.
3 Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press 8.
4 Press T or .... to highlight the QSound feature,
and then press'" or ~ to turn the QSound effect
On or Off.
Advanced Audio Settings
QSound
, -;'""":\<"
,;. <-
Reset
On
" I I ' ~ ~ ' ~ . ' . " . ...' ?,
,-_.
5 To save the new settings, highlight Done and
press 8.
To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press 8.
Note: If the broadcast is monaural, the
QSound effect will not work.
55 I
General troubleshooting
Before calling a service technician, please check this
chapter for a possible cause of the problem and some
solutions you can try.
Black box on-screen
• The closed caption feature is set to one of the Text
modes (n. T2, T3, or T4). Set the closed caption
feature to Off (1l?J' page 42).
TV stops responding to controls
• If the TV stops responding to the controls on
the remote control or TV control panel and you
cannot turn off the TV, press and hold the POWER
button on the TV control panel for 5 or more
seconds to reset the TV.
Other problems
• If your TV's problem is not addressed in this
Troubleshooting section or the recommended
solution has not worked, use the Restore Factory
Defaults procedure page 33).
TV will not turn on
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in, and
powE'R
then press ® .
• The remote control batteries may be dead.
Replace the batteries or try the control panel
bu\tons.
Picture problems
General picture problems
• Check the antenna/cable connections
Chapter 2).
• Press on the remote control or TV and
select a valid video input source (IrE page 34).
If no device is connected to a particular input
on the TV, no picture will display when you
select that particular input source. For device
connection details, see Chapter 2.
• Antenna reception may be poor. Use a highly
directional outdoor antenna (if applicable).
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try
another channel.
• Adjust the picture qualities (IrE page 42).
. . VCR k TVNCR h
• It you are usmg a , ma e sure <=:) on t e
remote control is set correctly (!Gil' page 22).
• Do not connect both a standard video cable and
an S-video cable to the VIDEO 1 input at the same
time (lIE page 14).
56
Noisy picture
• If you are watching an analog channel (off-
air broadcast or Cable TV), you can set the
CableClear@ feature to reduce visible interference
in the TV picture (lQr' page 54).
Video Input Selection problems
• If the Input Selection window does not appear
when you press on the remote control or
TV, press a second time, which will change
to the next video input source and display the
Input Selection window.
Cannot view external signals or channel
3 or4
• If you cannot view signals from external devices
connected to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, ColorStream
QQ
HDMll HOMI 2, HOMI 3, PC, or from channels
3 or 4, make sure the Input Lock is set to Off
page 48).
Poor color or no color
• The station may have broadcast difticulties. Try
another channel.
• Adjust the Tint and/or Color page 42).
Poor composite or S-video picture
• If the TV is connected to an external A/V device
(e.g., DVD player, video game system, set-top
box, etc.) try using a ColorStream or HDMI video
connection instead.
Picture and sound are out of sync
• As with all products that contain a digital display,
in rare instances, when viewing certain content
(e.g.. television broadcasts, video games, DVDs),
you may notice that the sound and picture are
slightly out of sync. This phenomenon can be
caused by various factors including, without
limitation, video processing within the TV, video
processing in an attached gaming system, and
video processing or different compression rates
used by broadcasters in their programming. You
may want to try one or more of the following
suggestions, which may help to reduce the effect
of this phenomenon:
- If the TV is connected to an AN receiver that
has a programmable audio delay feature, use
this feature to help synchronize the sound to
the picture.
- If you notice this phenomenon only on
certain TV channels, please contact your
local broadcast, cable, or satellite provider to
inform them of this issue.
Sound problems
• Check the antennalcable connections (1lSr' Chapter
2).
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try
another channel.
• The sound may be muted. Press VOLUME.
• If you hear no sound, try setting the MTS feature
to Stereo mode (1lSr' page 44).
• If you are not receiving a second audio program
from a known SAP source, make sure the MTS
feature is set to SAP mode ( I Q ~ page 44).
• If you hear audio that seems "incorrect" for the
program you are watching (such as music or a
foreign language), the SAP mode may be on. Set
the MTS feature to Stereo mode (1lSr' page 44).
Remote control problems
• Make sure the remote control is set to the correct
device mode (I@f page 21).
• Remove all obstructions between the remote
control and the TV.
• The remote control batteries may be dead.
Replace the batteries (1& page 20).
• Your TV remote control may not operate
certain features on your external device. Refer
to the owner's manual for your other device
to determine its available features. If your TV
remote control does not operate a specific feature
on another device, use the remote control that
came with the device (1& pages 22-26).
• If the TV still does not act as expected, use the
Reset Factory Defaults procedure ( ~ page 33).
Channel tuning problems
• Make sure the remote control is set to the correct
device mode ( ~ page 21 ).
• The channel may have been erased from the
channel memory by the Channel Add/Delete
feature. Add the channel to the channel memory
( ~ p a g e 30).
• The channel may be blocked by the Channels
Block feature. Unblock the channel ( ~ page 47).
• If you are unable to tune digital channels, check
the antenna configuration ( ~ page 29). Jf you
are still unable to tune digital channels, clear all
channels from the channel list ( ~ page 30) and
reprogram channels into the channel memory
(1lSr' page 20). If you are still unable to tune
digital channels, use the Reset Factory Defaults
procedure ( ~ p a g e 33). Also see "TV stops
responding to controls" and "Other problems"
(1lSr' page 56).
Closed caption problems
• If the program or video you selected is not
closed-captioned, no captions will display (1&
page 42).
• If text is not available, a black rectangle may
appear. If this happens, turn off the closed
caption feature ( ~ page 42).
• A closed-caption signal may not display
correctly in the following situations: a) when
a videotape has been dubbed; b) when the
signal reception is weak; or c) when the signal
reception is nonstandard (1& page 42).
Rating blocking (V-Chip) problems
• If you forget your PJN code: While the PJN
d
· . d' RECALL
co e enterIng screen IS (splayed. press 0
four times within 5 seconds. The PIN code you
previously stored will be cleared (1& page 45).
No REGZA-LiNK operation
• The REGZA-UNK feature is available for
Toshiba REGZA-UNK compatible devices.
• Make sure the HDMI cables with the HDMI
Logo (HOml) are used.
• When the connected REGZA-UNK device
does not work correctly after you have changed
settings of the device, turn off your TV and
unplug the power cord, then plug and turn on
again.
• If several devices are connected, REGZA-UNK
feature may not operate properly.
• Read the instruction manual furnished with the
connected REGZA-LlNK device.
HOMI problems
For HOMI cables
• Make sure to use cables with the HDMI Logo
(HOml) (1lSr' page 13).
For Legacy HOMI source
• Some legacy HDMJ sources may not work
properly with the latest HDMI TV products, due
to new standard adoption.
57 I
Specificali 0ns
Note:
• This model complies with the
specifications listed below.
• Designs and specifications are subject to
change without notice.
• This model may not be compatible with
features and/or specifications that may be
added in the future.
Television System
NTSC standard
ATSC standard (8VSB)
Digital Cable (64 QAM, 256 QAM; in-the-clear,
unencrypted)
Channel Coverage
VHF: 2 through 13
UHF: 14 through 69
Cable TV:
Mid band (A-g through A-I, A through I)
Super band (J through W)
Hyper band (AA through ZZ, AAA, BBB)
Ultra band (65 through 94, 100 through 135)
Power Source: 120 V AC, 60 Hz
Power Maximum Current
32RV525RZ/32RV52RZ: 1.85 A
37RV525RZ/37RV52RZ: 1.80 A
40RV525R/40RV52R: 2.75 A
40RV525RZ/40RV52RZ: 2.75 A
46RV525R/46RV525RZ : 2.95 A
Power Consumption
32RV525RZ/32RV52RZ: 0.6 W in standby mode
37RV525RZ/37RV52RZ: 0.6 W in standby mode
40RV525R/40RV52R: 0.6 W in standby mode
40RV525RZ/40RV52RZ:0.6 W in standby mode
46RV525R/46RV525RZ: 0.6 W in standby mode
Audio Power:
32RV525RZ132RV52RZ: 10 W + 10 W
37RV525RZ/37RV52RZ: lOW + lOW
40RV525R140RV52R: lOW + lOW
40RV525RZ/40RV52RZ: 10 W + 10 W
46RV525R/46RV525RZ: lOW + lOW
Speaker Type: Two 1-5/8 x 7-7/8 inches (4 x 20 cm)
Video/Audio Terminals
S- VIDEO INPUT:
Y: I V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.
C: 0.286 V(p-p) (burst signal), 75 ohm
VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT:
VIDEO: I V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30(Yn modulation
equivalent, 22 k ohm or greater)
I 58
ColorStream® (component video) HD INPUT:
VIDEO:Y: IV(p-p), 75 ohm
PR: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm
PB: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm
Suggested formats: 1080i, nop,
480p, 480i
AUDIO: 150 mV(nns), 22 k ohm or greater
HDMIIM INPUT:
HDMI compliant (type A connector)
HDCP compliant
Audio Lip Sync supported
Suggested formats: See table on the next page.
HDMI Audio: 2-channel Linear-PCM;
32/44.1/48 kHz
sampling frequency; 16/20124 bits
per sample
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT:
Optical type
PC INPUT:
15-Pin D-sub Analog RGB
Dimensions
32RV525RZ/32RV52RZ:
Width: 2'7-5/8 inches (804.6 mm)
Height: I' 10-7/8 inches (580.4 mm)
Depth: 9-1/8 inches (232.4 mm)
37RV525RZ/37RV52RZ:
Width: 3'-1/4 inches (921.5 mm)
Height: 2' 1-5/8 inches (649.6 mm)
Depth: 10-7/8 inches (276.3 mm)
40RV525R/40RV52R/40RV525RZ/40RV52RZ:
Width: 3'3-1/4 inches (996.6 mm)
Height: 2'2-7/8 inches (683.3mm)
Depth: 10-7/8 inches (276mm)
46RV525R/46RV525RZ:
Width: 3'8-3/8 inches (1127.5mm)
Height: 2'6 inches (761.1 mm)
Depth: 1'-3/4 inches (325.3 mOl)
Mass (Weight)
32RV525RZ/32RV52RZ: 27.2 Ibs (12.3 kg)
37RV525RZ/37RV52RZ: 34.4lbs (15.6 kg)
40RV525R/40RV52R: 39.3 Ibs (17.8 kg)
40RV525RZ/40RV52RZ:39.3 Ibs (17.8 kg)
46RV525R/46RV525RZ: 50.2 Ibs (22.8 kg)
Operating conditions
Temperature: 32°F - 95°F (O°C - 35°C)
Humidity: 20 - 80% (no moisture condensation)
Supplied Accessories
• Remote control with two size "AAA" batteries
• Owner's manual (this book)
• Cleaning cloth
Acceptable signal formats for PC IN and HDMI terminals
PC IN signal formats
Note: Depending on the connected PC, the following status may occur; incorrect display, false format
detection, picture position failure, blur, or judder But this is not a malfunction of your TV
VGA 640 x 400 70.090Hz 31.470kHz 25.180MHz
VGA 640 x 480
SVGA 800 x 600
XGA 1024 x 768
WXGA 1280 x 768
1360 x 768
SXGA 1280 x 1024
59.940Hz
60.317Hz
60.004Hz
59.870Hz
60.015Hz
60.020Hz
31.469kHz 25.175MHz
37.879kHz 40.000MHz
48.363kHz 65.000MHz
47.776kHz 79.500MHz
47.712kHz 85.500MHz
63.981kHz I08.000MHz
HDMI signal formats
640 x 480 59.940Hz 31.469kHz 25.175MHz
SVGA gOO x 600 60.317Hz 37.879kHz 40.000MHz
XGA 1024 x 768 60.004Hz 48.363kHz 65.000MHz
WXGA 1280 x 768 59.870Hz 47.776kHz 79.500MHz
1360 x 768 60.015Hz 47.712kHz 85.500MHz
SXGA 1280 x 1024 60.020Hz 63.981 kHz 108.000MHz
480i no x 480i 59.940Hz 15.734kHz 27.000MHz
480p no x 480p 59.940Hz 31.469kHz 27.000MHz
nop 1280 x nop 60.000Hz 45.000kHz 74.250MHz
1080i 1920 x 1080i 60.000Hz 33.750kHz 74.250MHz
I080p 1920 x I080p 24.000Hz 27.000kHz 74.250MHz
1080p I920 x I080p 60.000Hz 67.500kHz 148.500MHz
59 I
Limited United States Warranty
for LCD Televisions 26" and Larger
Toshiba America Consumer Products, LLC. ("TACP")
makes the following limited warranties to original
consumers in the United States.
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO
THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR
ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS LCD ELEVISION
AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER
PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR
TRANSFEREE. LCD TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN
THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF
THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
CANADA AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY
THESE WARRANTIES.
LCD TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE
OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED
IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE
WARRANTIES.
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor
TACP warrants this LCD Television and its parts against
defects in materials or workmanship for a period of
one (1) year after the date of original retail purchase.
DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP'S
OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART
WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT
CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR LABOR. During this
period, TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will
come to your home when warranty service IS required.
Depending on the type of repair required, the service
will either be performed in your home or the LCD
Television will be taken to a TACP Authorized Service
Station for repair and returned to your home at no cost
to you.
Rental Units
The warranty for LCD Television rental units begins on
the date of the first rental or thirty (30) days after the
date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes
first
Limited Warranty for Commercial Units
TACP warrants LCD Televisions that are sold and
used for commercial purposes as follows: all parts are
warranted against defects in materials or workmanship
for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of onglnal
retail purchase DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT
TACP'S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE
PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT
CHARGE TO YOU
Owner's Manual and Product Registration Card
Read this owner's manual thoroughly before operating
this LCD Television.
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration
card or register your LCD Television online at www.tacp.
com/service as soon as possible. By registering your LCD
Television you will enable TACP to bring you new products
specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to
contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification IS
required under the US. Consumer Produc:t Saf.ety Act.
Failure to complete and return the product registration card
does not diminish your warranty rights.
I 60
Your Responsibility
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
(1) You must retain your oriqinal bill of sale or
provide other prool of purcnase
(2) All warranty servicing of this LCD Television must
be performed by an Authorized TACP Service
Station.
(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if this
LCD Television is purchased and operated in the
Continental U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.
(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup.
adjustment of customer controls, and installation
or repair of antenna systems are not covered by
this warranty Reception problems caused by .
inadequate antenna systems, misaligned satellite
dishes, cable television distribution, VCRs, DVD
players/recorders, personal computer level IEEE-
1394 devices, and any other connected signal
source device are your responsibility
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials
or workmanship as limited above, and do not
extend to any LCD Television or parts that have
been lost or discarded by you or to damage
to the LCD Television or parts caused by fires,
misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning or
fluctuations in electric power). improper installation,
improper maintenance, or use in violation of .
instructions furnished by TACP; use or malfunction
through simultaneous use of this LCD Television
and connected equipment; or to units that have
been modified or had the serial number removed,
altered, defaced, or rendered illegible
How to Obtain Warranty Service
If after following all of the operating instructions
in this manual and reviewing the section entitled
"Troubleshooting," you find that service is needed
(1) To find the nearest TACP Authorized Service
Station, visit
TACP's website at www.tacp.com/service or contact
TACP's Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1-800-
631-3811.
(2) You must present your original bill of sale or other
proof of purchase to the TACP Authorized Service
Station.
For additional information, visit TACP's website:
www.tacp.com
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY
STATE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE
EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE
LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH
THE EXCEPTION OF ANY ARRANTIES IMPLIED
BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS
HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY
IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND
SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT
TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY
PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE LIABLE FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION
OR ERASURE OF RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY
USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS LCD
TELEVISION).
No person, agent, distributor. dealer, or company is
authorized to change, modify, or extend the terms of
these warranties in any manner whatsoever. The time
within which an action must be commenced to enforce
any obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or
under any statute or law of the United States or any
state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days from
the date you discover, or should have discovered,
the defect. This limitation does not apply to implied
warranties arising under the law of any state of the USA.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC lEGAL
RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS
WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE IN THE
U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT AllOW
LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED
WARRANTY, WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT,
OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. THEREFORE,
THE ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU
UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.
[0305]
Limited Canadian Warranty
for Toshiba Brand Flat Panel
Televisions
Toshiba of Canada limited ("TCl") makes the
follOWing limited warranties to original consumers in
Canada. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND
TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR
ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS TOSHIBA BRAND
FLAT PANEL TELEVISION (the ''TElEVISION(S)'' or
"Television(s)") AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL
CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER
PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN CANADA, AND USED
ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF CANADA INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE UNITED STATES
AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE
WARRANTIES.
TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE
OF CANADA, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
THE UNITED STATES AND MEXICO, AND USED
IN CANADA, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE
WARRANTI ES.
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labour
Subject to the more limited warranty if the Television is
used for any commercial or business purposes as set
out below, TCl warrants the Television and its parts
against material defects in materials or workmanship
that result in the Television failing for a period of one (1)
year after the elate of original retail purchase. DURING
THIS PERIOD, TCl Will, AT TCL:S OPTION, REPAIR
OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU
FOR PARTS OR lABOUR.
(a) FOR TELEVISIONS 32 INCHES OR lESS YOU
MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE TELEVISION TO
A TCl TELEVISION AUTHORIZED SERVICE
PROVIDER ("ASP"). YOU MUST PAY FOR All
TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES
FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP.
(b) FOR TELEVISIONS OVER 32 INCHES During this
period, ASP personnel will come to your home
when warranty service is required. Depending on
the type of repair required, the service will either
be performed in your home or the Television will
be taken to an ASP for repair and returned to your
home at no cost to you. IN-HOME SERVICE ONLY
APPLIES WITHIN 100 KilOMETERS OF AN ASP.
IFYOU ARE NOT WITHIN 100 KilOMETERS
OF AN ASP, YOU MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE
TELEVISION TO AN ASP. YOU MUST PAY FOR
All TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE
CHARGES FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM
THE ASP.
Limited Warranty for Commercial Units
TCl warrants Televisions that are used for any
commercial or business purposes as follows: all parts
are warranted against material defects in materials or
workmanship that result in the Television failing for a
period of ninety (90) days after the date of original retail
purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCl Will, AT TCL:S
OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE THE DEFECTIVE
PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART
WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.
(c) FOR TELEVISIONS 32 INCHES OR lESS: YOU
MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE TELEVISION
TO AN ASP. YOU MUST PAY FOR All
TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES
FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP.
(d) FOR TELEVISIONS OVER 32 INCHES During this
period, ASP personnel will come on-site when
warranty service is required. Depending on the
type of repair required, the service will either be
performed on-site or the Television will be taken
to an ASP for repair and returned at no cost to
you. ON-SITE SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN
100 KilOMETERS OF AN ASP. IF YOU ARE
NOT WITHIN 100 KilOMETERS OF AN ASP,
YOU MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE TELEVISION
TO AN ASP. YOU MUST PAY FOR All
TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES
FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP.
Rental Units
The warranty for Television rental units begins with the
date of first rental or thirty (30) days from the date of
shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.
Your Responsibility
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE
FOllOWING CONDITIONS:
(1) You must provide your bill of sale or other proof of
purchase.
(2) All warranty servicing of this Television must be
performed by an ASP.
(3) The warranties from TCl are effective only if the
Television is (i) purchased as new and unopened
from TCl or from TCl's authorized distributors,
dealers or resellers ("ADR's") and (ii) located/
operated in Canada
(4) labour charges for set installation, setup,
adjustment of customer controls, and installation
or repair of antenna systems are not covered by
these warranties. Reception problems caused by
inadequate antenna systems are your responsibility.
(5) Warranties extend only to material defects in
materials or workmanship as limited above, and do
not extend to:
a. Service, repairs or replacement made
necessary by accident, misuse, abuse,
moisture, liquids, dust, dirt, neglect, accident,
damage, 24/7 applications, improper
61
installation, improper operation, improper
cleaning, improper maintenance, normal
wear and tear, screen burn or image retention
caused by prolonged display of static images
and/or phosphor aging, or any other external
cause or event, act or omission outside
the control of TCl, including fire, theft, acts
of God, alteration, power failures, power
surges or power shortages, lightning, other
electrical faults, or repairs, modifications or
replacements by persons other than those
authorized by TCl to service the Television;
b. Replacement of missing, discarded or lost
parts, the provision of retrofits, or preventive
mai ntenance;
c. Repair of damage that is cosmetic only or
does not affect the Television functionality,
such as wear and tear, scratches and dents;
d. Service on Toshiba-branded accessory items
(such accessory items may be covered by
their own warranty);
e. Service on third party products or service
made necessary by use of incompatible third
party products;
f. Service made necessary by the simultaneous
use of this Television and connected
equipment;
g. Modifications to the Television not approved in
writing by TCl, and service made necessary
by the use or installation of non-Toshiba
modifications to the Television;
h. Service of a Television on which the TOSHIBA
label or logo, rating label or serial number
have been defaced or removed;
I. On-site service and repair of the Television;
and
j Damage to the Television caused by failure
to follow the specifications, User manuals or
guides as to usage and/or storage.
I 62
Disclaimer and Limitation of Remedy
TO THE EXTENT NOT PRECLUDED BY lAW, ALL
OTHER EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
CONDITIONS AND REPRESENTATIONS
FOR THIS TELEVISION, INCLUDING THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND
REPRESENTATIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED AND EXCLUDED.
IF THE APPLICABLE LAW, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, PRECLUDES THE EXCLUSION
OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS
AND REPRESENTATIONS THEN SUCH
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND
REPRESENTATIONS ARE OTHERWISE LIMITED
IN DURATION TO THE TERM OF THIS EXPRESS
WRIDEN LIMITED WARRANTY. TO THE EXTENT NOT
PRECLUDED BY LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE,
THIS WRIDEN WARRANTY SUPERCEDES AND
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY OTHER WARRANTY,
CONDITION OR REPRESENTATION NOT STATED
IN THIS WARRANTY, WHETHER MADE BY TCL,
TOSHIBA CORPORATION, THEIR AFFILIATES, ADRs
AND ASPs AND WHETHER MADE ORALLY OR IN
WRITING (INCLUDING ANY STATEMENT IN ANY
BROCHURE, PRESS RELEASE, ANNOUNCEMENT,
ADVERTISEMENT, POINT OF SALE DISPLAY, ETC.).
YOU MUST READ AND FOLLOW All SET-UP AND
USAGE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE APPLICABLE USER
GUIDES AND/OR MANUALS. IF YOU FAil TO DO SO,
THIS TELEVISION MAY NOT FUNCTION PROPERLY
AND YOU MAY SUFFER DAMAGE. THIS WARRANTY
WilL NOT COVER ANY SERVICE THAT IS REQUIRED,
IN PART OR IN WHOLE, AS A RESULT OF ANY
FAilURE TO FOLLOW THE SET-UP AND USAGE
INSTRUCTIONS. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY
AND SHALL BE VOID AND UNENFORCEABLE IF THE
TELEVISION IS OPENED, SERVICED, OR REPAIRED
BY PERSONS OTHER THAN THOSE AUTHORIZED BY
TCl TO SERVICE OR REPAIR THE TELEVISION.
IF THE TELEVISION FAilS TO WORK AS WARRANTED
ABOVE, YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
SHAll BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE
DEFECTIVE PART. IN NO EVENT Will TCl, TOSHIBA
CORPORATION, THEIR AFFILIATES, ADRs OR
ASPs (THE "RELATED PARTIES") BE LIABLE TO
YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES
MONEY. REIMBURSEMENT. COSTS OR EXPENSES.
THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO DAMAGES, MONEY,
REIMBURSEMENT, COSTS OR EXPENSES OF ANY
KIND WHATSOEVER INCLUDING ANY DIRECT OR
INDIRECT DAMAGES, DAMAGE TO PROPERTY
OR ERSON, LOST PROFITS, lOST SAVINGS,
INCONVENIENCE OR OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH
OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE),
UNDER A STATUTE OR UNDER ANY OTHER LAW OR
FORM OR ACTION, OR WHETHER ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELEVISION,
VEN IF ANY OF THE RELATED PARTIES HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES
OR OF ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.
No person, agent, distributor, dealer or company is
authorized to change, modify or extend the terms of
these warranties in any manner whatsoever.
Arbitration and Dispute Resolution
To the extent not precluded by law, any claim, dispute,
controversy or disagreement (whether for breach of
warranty, breach of contract, tort (including negligence
and negligent and/or fraudulent misrepresentation),
under a statute or under any other law or form of action)
against any of the Related Parties arising out of, or
otherwise relating to: (i) this warranty; (ii) the Television;
(iii) any oral or written representations, statements,
brochures, press releases, advertising, announcement,
point of sale display, or promotional material relating to
the Television; (iv) the relationships that result from this
warranty, (the foregoing claims, disputes controversies
and disagreements are collectively referred to as the
"Dispute"), shall be referred to and resolved by final
and binding arbitration (to the exclusion of the courts).
To the extent not precluded by law, you agree to waive
any right that you may have to commence or participate
in any representative or class proceeding against the
Related Parties relating to any Dispute. If and where
applicable and to the extent not precluded by law, you
further agree to opt out of any such representative or
class proceedings. Arbitration of any Dispute will be
conducted in the forum and in the manner as agreed
to between you and TCl. Failing such agreement, the
arbitration will be conducted by one arbitrator pursuant
to the laws and rules relating to arbitration generally in
force in the jurisdiction in which you reside at the time
that the Dispute arises. To the extent not precluded by
law, no claim, dispute, controversy or disagreement of
any other person may be joined or combined with any
Dispute by you, without the prior written consent of TCl.
Critical Applications
The Television you have purchased is not designed
for any "critical applications." "Critical applications"
means life support systems, medical applications,
connections to implanted medical devices, commercial
transportation, nuclear facilities or systems or any other
applications where Television failure could lead to
injury to persons or loss of life or catastrophic property
damage.
IF THE CUSTOMER USES THE TELEVISION IN ANY
CRITICAL APPLICATION, THE CUSTOMER - AND
NOT TCl, ITS AFFILIATES, ADRs OR ASPs - ASSUME
SOLE AND FUll RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUCH USE
TCl RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REFUSE TO SERVICE
ANY TELEVISION USED IN A CRITICAL APPLICATION.
TCl, ITS AFFILIATES, ADRs AND ASPs HEREBY
DISCLAIM ANY AND All LIABILITY, DAMAGES AND
CONSEQUENCES ARISING OUT OF THE SERVICE
OR REFUSAL TO SERVICE SUCH TELEVISION
AND FURTHER DISCLAIM ANY AND All LIABILITY,
CONSEQUENCES AND DAMAGES THAT MAY ARISE
OR RESULT FROM THE USE OF THE TELEVISION IN
ANY CRITICAL APPLICATIONS.
General Provisions
If and to the extent that any provision of this
limited warranty should generally be found to be
unenforceable, the unenforceable provision shall be
severed from the warranty and deemed not to form
part of the warranty. The remaining provisions of this
warranty shall be and remain valid and enforceable.
If and to the extent that any provision of this limited
warranty as it relates to any of the Related Parties is
found to be invalid or unenforceable in respect of that
party (the "Excluded Party") the Excluded Party shall be
deemed to be severed or excluded from the provision,
and the provision shall remain valid enforceable and
applicable in respect of the other or remaining Related
Parties.
To the extent permitted by law, this limited warranty shall
be governed and construed in accordance with the
laws of Ontario
If there is any inconsistency between this limited
warranty, on the one hand, and any statement in the
packaging of the Television or in any other document
enclosed with, or used in the context of the promotion or
sale of, the Television, on the other hand, the provisions
of this limited warranty shall prevail.
How to Obtain Warranty Services
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this
manual and checking the "Troubleshooting" section,
you find that service is needed:
(1) To find the nearest ASP, visit TCL's web site at www.
toshiba.ca, or call toll free 1-800-268-3404
(2) Present your bill of sale or other proof of purchase
to the ASP.
For additional information, visit TCl's website at www.
toshiba.ca
A copy of the GPl source code in this product
may be obtained by contacting Toshiba Consumer
Solutions at (800)631-3811 . There will be a charge to
cover the costs of providing the source code.
63
TOSHIBAAMERICACONSUMER
PRODUCTS
J
L.L.C.
Corporate Headquarters: 82 TOTOWA ROAD, WAYNE, NJ 07470, USA.
NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION: 1420-B TOSHIBA DRIVE, LEBANON, TN 37087, U.S.A.
TOSHIBAOF CANADALTD.
HEAD OFFICE: 191 McNABB STREET, MARKHAM, ONTARIO, L3R 8H2, CANADA
- TEL: (905) 470-5400
SERVICE CENTERS:
TORONTO: 191 McNABB STREET, MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R 8H2, CANADA
- TEL: (905) 470- 5400
MONTREAL: 18050 TRANS CANADA, KIRKLAND, QUEBEC, H9J 4A1, CANADA
- TEL: (514) 390-7766
VANCOUVER: 6932 GREENWOOD STREET, BURNABY, B.C., V5A 1X8, CANADA
- TEL: (604) 303-2500
CableClear, ColorStream, GameTimer, and TheaterWide are registered trademarks of Toshiba
America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
Channel Browser, DynaLight, and SurfLock are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer
Products, L.L.C.
REGZA-L1NK is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
PRINTED IN CHINA
TOSHIBA
xl
®
x4
WARNING: To prevent possible electric shock, protect the
power cord from being pinched when attaching the pedestal
stand.
CAUTION: Before beginning pedestal assembly, carefully
lay the front of the LCD Panel face down on a flat, cushioned
surface such as a quilt or blanket. Leave the bottom of the
unit protruding over the edge of the surface and assemble
pedestal as indicated below.
Note: Extreme care should always be used when attaching
the pedestal stand to avoid damage to the LCD panel.
111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111I1111111
HF6TB370011
AVERTISSEMENT :Pour eviter tout risque de choc electrique,
empEkher Ie cordon electrique d'etre coince en fixant Ie
piedestal.
ATTENTION :Avant de commencer I' assemblage du support de
table, placer avec soin I'avant du panneau ACL, face vers Ie bas, sur
une surface plane, matelassee, comme sur une courtepointe ou une
couverture. Laisser depasser Ie bas de I'unite du rebord de la surface
et monter Ie support de table tel qu'indique ci-dessous.
Remarque :Toujours faire tres attention quand vous attachez Ie
support de table pour eviter d'endommager Ie panneau ACL.
If you are experiencing a technical problem or have questions regarding operation, authorized service centers, warranty or
parts, please contact our Customer Service Department at:
1·(800) 631-3811 (For US Customers)
1-(800) 268-3404 (For Canadian Customers)
Many questions regarding parts, service, and warranties can be answered by visiting the Customer Support Section of our
website: www.tacp.com (For US Customers)
www.toshiba.ca (For Canadian Customers)
THANK YOU
Si vous eprouvez des difficultes techniques ou si vous avez des questions concernant Ie fanctionnement du produit, les
centres de service autarises, la garantie au les pieces, veuillez appeler notre departement du service a la clientele au:
1-(800) 631-3811 (Etats·Unls seulement)
1-(800) 268·3404 (Canada seulement)
Vaus trouverez egalement des reponses ade nombreuses questions sur les pieces, Ie service etles garanties en visitant
la section Sautien a la clientele de notre site Web:
www.tacp.cam (Etats-Unis seulement)
www.toshiba.ca (Canada seulement)
MERel
'-PLEASE SEE OPPOSITE SIDE OF THIS PAPER FOR QUICK SETUP DIRECTIONS'- ;>
HDTV Quick Set.Up Guide (For US customers)
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Toshiba High-Definition Television. You must get HD Signal to get an HD Picture!
Getting HDTV is as easy as 1,2 or 3.
There are 3 basic ways to receive an HDTV Signal on your new High-Definition TV
Digital Cable or Digital Satellite is not HDTV. The picture quality is superior to standard analog cable. but it is not HOTV! See the difference HD
Programming makes!
Satellite Customers will need a
High-Definition satellite receiver
and appropriate dish hardware.
(Additional monthly subscription
cost may apply)
Over-The- Air (Antenna)
Connect a high quality outside
antenna (not supplied) directly
to the antenna input on the Tv.
(Reception cannot be guaranteed
and is based on proximity [0
local signal)
Additional HOTV Antenna Reference Information nn be obtained from

2 CABLE
II
Cable Customers will need to
subscribe to High-Definition
Digital Cable from your local
provider. (Additional monthly
subscription cost may apply)
3 SATELLITE
II
Once you have a High-Definition Signal you need to connect it to a High-Definition Input on your TV.
If you are connecting directly from an antenna or basic cable.
! If YiU are using an HD Cable Box or HD Satellite Box, there are 3 standard connections that can be used to receive an HD signal.
I Antenna Input 2 HDMI- to HDMI- 3 DVI to HDMI" 4 Component Video Input
To connect directly from an
antenna or basic cable.
Connect the cable directly
to the antenna input on the
back of the Tv.
HOMI'" is the best connection for
HOTV.
This is a digital connection that
carries both digital video and
digital audio.
Your HO Cable Box or HO Satellite Receiver may have
a OVI connection. This will be connected to the HOMr"
jack on the TV using an HOMI'" cable and an HOMI"' to
OVI converter.
OVI carries digital video only. Therefore, this will require
a separate analog audio connection as well. (use the red
and white audio connections)
ColorScream· HO Component may also be used to
receive HOT¥.
Use if no HOMI"' or OVI jack is available.
There are 3 jacks color-coded with Red-Green-Blue on
the back of the TV and HO Cable Box or HO Satellite
Receiver.
This connection will require a separate analog audio
connection. (use the red and white audio connections)
INPUT
TV
,
OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT INPUT
Cable box I Satellite boK TV Cable box I Satellite box TV Cable box I Satellite box TV
HOml HOml
""
,""""c
Hi:Jml
""""
'"""
"''''' RlYPloPR
, C ,
"
""
- -
• Ii:)
-

.Ii:)••• .Ii:) •••
, ,
"

,
t


Now that you have HD Programming and are connected to an HD Input, Tune to an HD Channel (Remember not all channels are currently broadcast in HD) Sit back, relax and enjoy the superior quality of High-Definition.
NOle: Slondan;l onolog TV channels ond HD chonnels, even on rhe some network. broodcosl on different channels. fJlample:ABC aoolog may be on channel 4, while ABC-HD may be on channel 1O.f.
If you are experiencing problems please call Toshiba Customer Service at 1-800·631-381 I
All cables lind AOOptera IIle sold separately.
fOf additional Toshiba Producllnlormation visit www.lacp.com.Pleaserememberlocompleteyourproduc1 registration. Failure 10 register your produc1 does not disminish your warranty righlS.
TOSHIBA
Ludlnt .......wallon »)
Congratulations for choosing Toshiba, a leader in developing tomorrow's technology today. ToshibC'. is committed to producing high-quality, reliable and innovative products. To uphold
our commitment to excellence, we need to understand our customers' needs.
Please complete the following Product Registration Card. The information we are asking from you below will help us bring you new products specifically designed to meet your
needs. By registering your product you will automatically be enrolled in our Consumer Information Program, which provides you with the following benefits:
1. PRODUCT SAFETY NOTIFICATION: Registering our product will allow us to contact you in the unlikely event a product safety notification is required.
2. CONFIRMATION OF OWNERSHIP: We will keep the model number, serial number, and other information on this card in our files for up 10 ten years. In the event of fire, flood or
theft, your registration will serve as your proof of purchase for insurance purposes.
3. WARRANTY SERVICE: Filling out this card will help us contact you in case there is a problem with this product.
IMPORTANT: Please register your product within 10 days by mail or register online @ www.tacp.toshiba.com/register
1. 0 Mr. 0 Mrs. 0 Ms. 0 Miss Email address I I
Apt. No.
~
Date of LULULU
Purchase
Area Code Area Code Month Day Year
IMPORTANT! To ensure your enrollment in Toshiba's Consumer Information Program, write the complete model number of the product you purchased in the space below.
3. Model Number 4. Serial Number
5.
6.
Price paid (excluding tax) $ ~ .00
Have you purchased a service contract or extended warranty for this product? 7.
1. §Yes, from my retail dealer
2. No, but contract was offered by my retail dealer
3. No, contract was not offered
a. If you answered "yes" to 6, how long does your service contract or extended warranty last?
1. 01 Year 3. o 3 Years
2. 0 2 Years 4. 0 More than 3 Years
b. Would you like to obtain more information from Toshiba on extended warranties:
1. 0 Yes 2. 0 No
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
Where was this product purchased?
~
Received as a Gift 07. ~ Catalog Showroom
Department Store 08. Rental Dealer
Discount Store 09. Mail Order
TV/Appliance Store 10. Premium Offer
Specialty/Electronics Store 11. Other
Warehouse/Membership Club
fold here
With #1 being the most important, prioritize the following:
1. Where do you get new product information?
___ newspaper
___ tech magazines
news broadcasts
on-line
___ product literature
___ retail salesperson
other
2. What resources do you use to make your purchase decision?
___ friends/family
on-line research
___ retail salesperson
___ product reviews
other
3. What do you look for when purchasing CE products:
___ style, cosmetics
___ picture quality
brand
___ quality
___ price
___ technology
___ reliability
4. Why did you choose this product?
___ brand image
___ quality
___ price
___ purchased other Toshiba products
___ technology
___ reliability
___ recommended by a friend/family
___ product reviews
Check all that apply
5. Which of the following products do you own?
Product Manufacturer
___TV - projection TV
___ TV - tabletop
TV Combination
___TV - flat panel/plasma
___ DVD player
Home Theater in a Box
TiVo®
___ Home Networking Server
___ Computer
___ Audio Player
___ Digital Camera
___ Digital Camcorder
Receiver
___ Speakers - stand alone
Other
6. May we contact you?
DYes 0 No Email: _
Thanks for taking the time to fill out this
questionnaire. Your answers will be used for
market research studies and reports.
o Please check here if, for some reason,
you would prefer not to participate in the opportunity.
II1IIII111111I11111111I11I111111I11I1111111111111111I111I1II1111
HF6V42T0121
IMPORTANTI
TOSHIBA
Image is Everything™
PRODUCT REGISTRATION CARD
Complete and return this Product Registration Card within 10 days to receive
valuable Toshiba information. Failure to complete and return this card does not
diminish your warranty rights.
See details inside...
If you have comments or suggestions about our product, please write to:
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. » 82 Totowa Road »Wayne, NJ 07470
Copyright © 2004 All Rights Reserved Please seal with tape. Do not staple.
Please send products and other correspondence to:
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
82 Totowa Road
Wayne, NJ 07470
First Class
Postage
Required
Post Office will
not deliver without
proper postage.
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
P.O. Box 174007
Denver, CO 80217-4007

Dear Customer,
Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba LCD TV. This manual will help you use the many exciting features of your new LCD TV. Before operating your LCD TV, please read this manual completely, and keep it nearby for future reference.

CHILD SAFETY:
It Makes ADifference How and Where You Use Your Flat Panel Display

Safety Precautions
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

Congratulations on your purchase! As you enjoy your new product, please keep these safety tips in mind:
The Issue
• The home theater entertainment experience is a growing trend and larger flat panel displays are popular purchases. However, flat panel displays are not always supported on the proper stands or installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations . • Flat panel displays that are inappropriately situated on dressers, bookcases, shelves, desks, speakers, chests or carts may fall over and cause injury.

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER·SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

TOSHIBA Cares!
• The consumer electronics industry is committed to making home entertainment enjoyable and safe

~. A\ it

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the .... . presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the ........ - product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute arisk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

Tune Into Safety
• One size does NOT fit all. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for the safe installation and use of your flat panel display. • Carefully read and understand all enclosed instructions for proper use of this product. • Don't allow children to climb on or play with furniture and television sets. • Don't place flat panel displays on furniture that can easily be used as steps, such as a chest of drawers. • Remember that children can become excited while watching a program, especially on a "larger than life" flat panel display Care should be taken to place or install the display where it cannot be pushed, pulled over, or knocked down. • Care should be taken to route all cords and cables connected to the flat panel display so that they cannot be pulled or grabbed by curious children.

WARNING
To prevent injury, this apparatus must be securely attached to the floor/wall in accordance with the installation instructions. See item 23 on page 4.

WARNING: If you decide to wall mount this television, always use a UL Listed wall bracket appropriate for the size and weight of this television. The use of any wall bracket other than a UL Listed wall bracket appropriate for the size and weight of this television for wall mounting this television could result in serious bodily injury and/or property damage. See "Removing the Pedestal Stand" (Ifill' page 6). NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS
This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the U.S. NEC, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the POint of cable entry as practical. For additional antenna grounding information, see items 30 and 31 on page 4.

Wall Mounting: If you decide to wall mount your flat panel display, always:
• Use a mount that has been recommended by the display manufacturer and/or listed by an independent laboratory (such as UL, GSA, ETL). • Follow all instructions supplied by the display and wall mount man ufactu rers. • If you have any doubts about your ability to safely install your flat panel display, contact your retailer about professional installation. • Make sure that the wall where you are mounting the display is appropriate. Some wall mounts are not designed to be mounted to walls with steel studs or old cinder block construction If you are unsure, contact a professional installer. • A minimum of two people are required for installation. Flat panel displays can be heavy. www.CE.org/safety

2

Important Safety Instructions
1)

2) 3) 4)

Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions.

~L __~~_~_~t _~_s_~_!~!~_~ep.~~.a_t~~_~_~~L~ ~~_~L __.
?_L.~I_~~_~_~.~_~y-_~_i_t~._~_~y-_.c_I_~!~.:
7)

.__ ......
---~-----------~------

.._ ..__. _...
-.----

• NEVER allow your body to come in contact with any broken glass or liquid from the damaged television. The LCD panel inside the TV contains glass and a toxic liquid. If the liquid comes in contact with your mouth or eyes, or your skin is cut by broken glass, rinse the affected area thoroughly with water and consult your doctor. • ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect the TV any time it has been damaged or dropped.

Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
--- --------~~-----~~---

15) CAUTION:
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely to prevent blade exposure. • To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of ______ __ .p!~_~_!_o __~!.~_e_ ~~o~;_~IJ~_!~s~rt. .. .. '
16) WARNING: To prevent the spread of fire, keep candles or other open flames away from this product at all times.

~-------'---'

8)

Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus ..... (L~.c.I_~.~i~9.~ Il1pl!!.i.~_r~) .t~~! PEg~.~g_e.~.e~!_ . 9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug. A polarized Wide blade ~ plug has two blades with one wider ~~.. ~ ... than the other. A grounding type .'. plug has two blades and a third ~~ grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an el.e.ctrician for Ee.pl~~e._rllent~f.t.h.e. __ ~~~olete.g_u.tle.t .. 10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, ~_ convenience receptacles, and the point . . •.'. ,. .. __~_~_~.r.e. .!~e.X_e.~i!_f!-o.ll1_ !_~.e. __~P_p_~_r.~~~: 11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. _. . -------------._--. -' .. _.. - --.-.-----------".. __ .- .. . - .... _---- -----, --_ .. _----------

Installation, Care, and Service
Installation
Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all warnings when installing your TV:
----~------

'W=

--- ---._-

..

_--

------_. - --, -

-----_._- --

..

- -

-

--- ---- -- -- _. --

.....

17) WARNING: NEVER expose batteries to excessive

"

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving ~he cart/app~ratus combination to avoid • ~ Injury from tip-over. ~ 'i. _
- ----_._.',,--' ...-.------ .. _----_ ... _.... ---_ .... ---_._-- ------ .•.."-- -_.' .- .. _---------.- _." -

_I

~

heat ._--- as _.. - ---------_._---_ .... --_._-----_ .. _. such---. sunshine, fire or the like . - 18) ALWAYS plug the product into an outlet that is located in such a manner that ~ it can be easily unplugged in case the pr_od_~ct req_uire~seryice. ...... -. •

;j\

.. ---

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
--

19) NEVER route the product's power cord inside a wall or similar enclosed area.
20) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user's authority to operate this equipment under the rules of the Federal Communications Commission.

-- - -

~-

-- .--- ------

- -- ---- ---- -- -- ----

--~----

~-----------------

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

21)

it

Additional Safety Precautions
14a) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does not operate normally, take the following precautions: • ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power cord to avoid possible electric shock or fire.

------_._---~.~-------------

DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR EQUIPMENT • DAMAGE! Never place the TV on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV may fall, causing serious personal • ~ injury, death, or serious damage i ~~ to the TV ._-- -_. --_ .. _--- --_. ---._-_. -- - -- - .. _------------ ._--- _. ----

(I) 1I1
._.

'--

22) To avoid damage to this product, never place or store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; or areas subject to excessive dust or vibration.
(COli! illllcd)

3

. secure. 35) While it is thundering._... (cOlltinued) 4 .. • Use extreme care to make sure you are never ina position where your body (or any item you are in contact with. use a sturdy strap from the hook(s) on the rear of the TV to a wall stud.... .- ~ RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! ~ WARNING: Lb .~~ . f.: .~·:-=-.. Gently wipe the display panel surface (the TV screen) using a dry._ . Never place the TV: • on a bed. and parallel to the floor. ---_ .._------29) Always operate this equipment from a 120 VAC.~~~_s.j\ Never spill liquids or push objects of any kind into the TV cabinet slots. Never locate the antenna near overhead power lines or other electrical circuits. .C!.~ p'._~-.~Le..r a... the picture brightness may vary until the LCD warms up.. or similar surface. --~-_. rug.~_ 27) Never allow anything to rest on or rollover the power cord. 33) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. always unplug the power cord and disconnect the antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or unused for long periods of time. ._------'. . -~---_. 9 J 24) The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids.. or • in a confined space such as a bookcase.__.s possible) . ...__. flannel. • Never attempt to install any of the following during lightning activity: a) an antenna system. / // Antenna lead-in wire l-·:··::~ ._- ..__. This is not a sign of malfunction. pillar.. such . The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the TV..h..P!. 34) _..t.._-----------... or any home theater component connected to an antenna or phone system.23) Always place the TV on the floor or a sturdy..-.-..e!-_y~~!~~!!~~:.pl.. • too close to drapes._------------------------------.. such as a ladder or screwdriver) can accidentally touch overhead power lines.. wires.!?_.. soft cloth only (cotton. built-in cabinet.._. ~. s. which may damage the surface...:. thinner.t~e._----~--------------------~~-_. acidic or alkaline solvent cleaners.).~~~~ "~~~!~_~~ . A hard cloth may damage the surface of the panel.::. curtains.~L?Q_~. Power service grounding / ....~!!U~il~g~.... .•o. or walls._----_. Y._ .-.-------------- Care For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA TV..~~... and never place the TV where the power cord is .. or any other place with poor ventilation.__ .•.oJy. bottom. sofa._._--------- ~ /' Grounding conductors (NEC Section 810-21) Ground clamps . To secure the TV.._ J:iU~Q'!Y._. __ .~9_e .~. TV top min.__.. . 26) Always place the back of the television at least four (4) inches away from any vertical surface (such as a .~p-e~~~t~~. __. etc.~~_~L. .. or chemical cloths.=·:=::::::.. Avoid contact with alcohol. or other immovable structure.. ~ 31) Lh • DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH! JH' ~ TV side L~ 4" Sturdy strap (as.. ---. Make sure the strap is tight..-.' benzene.:::. s.. abrasive 0~" cleaners. follow these recommendations and precautions: 32) If you use the TV in a room whose temperature is 32 OF (0 °C) or below._ ':Y. do not touch the connecting cables or apparatus. level.._. -~--- 28) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords. --_. ----.. . or b) cables._ .----~-_... Never spray volatile compounds such as insecticide on the cabinet. stable surface that can support the weight of the unit.. " .~~~~. 60 .~e. 25) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV cabinet back.. HO(Ok ~ t:~/ . 30) Always make sure the antenna system is properly grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the National Electric Code). Such products may damage or discolor the cabinet._------------. and sides.. .. _.e:.. Leave aspace of at least 4 (four) inches around the TV. --".· ~ Electric service equipment / / /Ground clamp ~ Antenna discharge unit ~/ (NEC Section 810-20) ---_.electrode system (NEC Art 250 Part-H) 36) For added protection of your TV from lightning and power surges.Q.

surface.. Refer all servicing not specified in this manual to a Toshiba Authorized Service Center. especially when the unit is being turned on or off. . the TV may make occasional snapping or popping sounds. 3) Remove the screws of the VESA Mounting Pattern show in the right diagram. CAUTION: Before beginning pedestal assembly. 4) Follow the instructions provided with your wall bracket. 42) If you have the TV serviced: • Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts specified by the manufacturer. I II. 2) Unplug and remove any cables and/or other component connectors from the rear of the TV.eiae. such as in front of a window..II I I I (continued) 5 . These actions will damage the LCD screen. 38) During normal use. ask the service technician to perform routine safety checks to _. If these sounds become frequent or continuous. 5) After attaching the appropriate bracket(s) to the wall and the back of the TV. To Display your LCD TV using a Wall Bracket: Never attempt to service the TV yourself.~_~!. (1& item 23.!he}V is in safe_~e~~~~9-_~on~~~?. Lh • DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH! 0 J) . If you decide to wall mount your LCD TV.. or ask a qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV. pillar. When selecting a location for the television. • Never touch. • Upon completion of service.. unplug the power cord and contact aToshiba Authorized Service Center.~ 40) • The LCD screen of this product can be damaged by ultraviolet radiation from the sun.n. Before proceeding. For disposal or recycling information. press. always use a UL listed wall bracket appropriate for the size and weight of the LCD TV (1& page 2): I) CAUTION: Two people are required for installation.--. Note: The lamp(s) inside this product I I I . When the TV reaches the end of its useful life. cushioned surface such as a quilt or blanket. it is not completely disconnected from power and a minute amount of current is still consumed. level surface that can support the weight of the TV. or other immovable structure. Opening and removing the covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. make sure the appropriate bracket(s) are attached to the wall and the back of the TV as described in the instructions provided with the wall bracket. 39) I I I I contain mercury Disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations. dispose of the used TV by the approved method for your area. avoid locations where the screen may be exposed to direct sunlight.. When the TV is turned off using the on/off switch. 3) Be sure to secure the TV to a wall. .. "l"'ll!'b. or place anything on the LCD screen. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death or serious injury.:_ 43) The cold cathode fluorescent lamp in the LCD panel contains asmall amount of mercury.org).1. This is normal. _ "'.----------~---------~~--~-~----~--- I 37) ALWAYS unplug the TV to completely disconnect from mains power. Note: Extreme care should always be used when attaching the pedestal stand to avoid damage to the LCD panel. contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance (www.~~~~ Never strike the screen ___ ~ I I i II I' ~~l:cl_ sh_a:_o_rh_::'~_. remove the pedestal stand from the TV as described below. page 4). 2) Place the TV on a sturdy. det~_~J!!~__!ha!. I Choosing a location for your LCD TV I I i i II To Display your LCD TV on the included Pedestal Stand: Observe the following safety precautions: I) Read and Follow the pedestal assembly instructions included with the pedestal. Leave the bottom of the unit protruding over the edge of the surface and assemble the pedestal as indicated below. carefully lay the front of the LCD Panel face down on a flat.

6) VESA Mounting Pattern 40" TV VESA Mounting Pattern TV Size 31" 31" 40" 46" Hole Pattern(HxV) 200x200 mm 200x200 mm 200x200 mm 400x200 mm Screw Size M6 M6 M6 MR (unit in mm) Removing the Pedestal Stand I) Carefully lay the front of the unit face down on a tlat. and parallel to the floor. To secure the TV. Make sure the strap is tight. Four screws Hook Sturdy strap (as short as possible) 46" TV 2) 3) Remove the four screws shown in the right diagram. holding the pedestal stand in place. pillar. VESA Mounting Pattern VESA Mounting Pattern 32" TV Four screws Sturdy strap (as short as possible) Four screws Sturdy strap (as short as possible) VESA Mounting Pattern 37" TV CAUTION: Always place the TV on the floor or a sturdy. Four screws Hook Stu rdy strap (as short as possible) 6 . stable surface that can support the weight of the unit. Note: Extreme care should always be used when removing the pedestal stand to avoid damage to the LCD panel. secure. Leave the stand protruding over the edge of the surface. or other immovable structure. remove the pedestal sland from the TV. Once you have removed all four screws. This wi II allow removal of the pedestal stand. use a sturdy strap from the hook(s) on the rear of the TV to a wall stud. level. cushioned surface such as a quilt or blanket.

Toshiba is not responsible for perceived issues resulting from these symptoms. etc. 1) An afterimage (ghost) may appear on the screen if a fixed. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.40RV525RZ. there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. • Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instructions. the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.L.40RV525R. and is not covered under your warranty. Trademark Information • OSound and [~] symbol are trademarks of OSound Labs. However.). including interference that may cause undesired operation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. there may be an occasional pixel (dot of light) that does not operate properly (does not light. 37RV52RZ. uses. select [Standard] picture mode. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device. nonmoving image is displayed for a long period of time. and 46RV525RZ Televisions comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules. pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. Consult the dealer or an experienced radiorrV technician for help. Environmental Protection Agency. Important notes about your LCD TV The following symptoms are technical limitations of LCD Display technology and are not an indication of malfunction. 40RV52RZ. 46RV525R. which can be determined by removing and applying power to the equipment. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (I) this device may not cause harmful interference. Wayne. • HDMI. To return to [Home] mode settings. Inc. NJ 07470. and (2) this device must accept any interference received. The afterimage is not permanent and will disappear in a short period of time. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent green house gas emissions by meeting strict guidelines set by the U. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U. 7 . This is a structural property of LCD technology. To ensure your television is operating at optimal energy efficiency. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception. This equipment generates. may cause harmful interference to radio communications. 37RV525RZ. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.C. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit ditferent from that to which the receiver is connected. Ph: 1-800-631-3811 ENERGY STAR® qualified TV. remains constantly lit. 32RV52RZ. Note: Interactive video games that involve shooting a "gun" type of joystick at an onscreen target may not work with this TV Caution: Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.S. • • • • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ENERGY STAf(BJ User Information ENERGY STAR User Information Statement: the factory default settings of this television meet ENERGY STAR requirements.40RV52R. Changing Picture Settings may increase energy consumption. therefore. the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures. The party responsible for compliance to these rules is: Toshiba America Consumer Products. select [Home 1mode during initial activation.FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement (Part 15): The Toshiba 32RV525RZ. Such pixels are not visible when the picture is viewed from a normal viewing distance. marks. L. is not a sign of malfunction. 2) The LCD panel contained in this T~ is manufactured using an extremely high level of precision technology: however. possibly beyond the limits required for ENERGY STAR qualification. 82 Totowa Rd. [Standard] mode is recommended for normal home use.S.

Limited Canadian Warranty for Toshiba Brand Flat Panel Televisions 58 58 59 60 61 8 .. Cable TV or Camcorder 14 Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream' (component video). Tuning to a specific channel (programmed or unprogrammed) Switching between two channels using Channel Return Switching between two channels using SurfLockH1 Selecting the picture size 34 34 34 35 35 37 38 38 38 38 38 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting General troubleshooting 56 56 Chapter 9: Appendix Specifications Acceptable signal fonnats for PC IN and HDMlterminals Limited United States Warranty for LCD Televisions 26" and Larger. Tuning channels using the Channel Browser DI Setting the Channel Tuning Mode Tuning to the next programmed channe!. 15 Connecting an HDMITM or DVI device to the HOMI input 16 REGZA-LlNK® connection 17 Connecting a digital audio system 18 Connecting an audio system 18 Connecting a personal computer (PC) 19 Chapter 3: Using the remote control Prcparing the remote control for use Installing the remote control batteries Remote control effective range Learning about the remote c.) control REGZA-L1NK® input source selection VOLUME and MUTE controls of Audio Receiver Other REGZA-L1NK(~ functions Displaying TV status information Understanding the auto power off feature Undcrstanding the last mode memory feature 40 40 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 45 45 45 45 45 45 46 47 48 48 48 49 49 50 50 "0 ) 50 51 51 51 52 52 52 Chapter 7: Using the TV's advanced features Using the advanced picture settings features Using dynamic contrast Using the static gamma feature Using CableClear~ digital noise reduction Using MPEG noise reduction Using the Game Mode teature Usin bo the advanced audio settings features (f Using the QSound') sound feature 53 53 53 53 54 54 54 55 55 Chapter 6: Using the TV's features Selecting the video input source to view Labeling the video input sources Tuning channels ~ ..ntrol Using the remote control to control your other devices Remote Control functional key chart. and using your new TV TV front and side panel controls and connections TV back panel connections 3 3 9 9 10 ll 12 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV 13 Overview of cable types 13 About the connection illustrations 13 Connecting a VCR (or a VCR with S-video) and antenna. Programming the remote control to control your other devices Remote control codes 20 20 20 20 21 22 23 24 25 Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation Main menu 1ayout.. setting up. Setup/Installation menu layou!. Setting the time zone Viewing the system status 29 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 31 32 33 33 33 Scrolling the TheaterWide@ picture (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only) Using the auto aspect ratio feature Selecting the cinema mode Using the FREEZE feature Adjusting the picture Selecting the picture mode Adjusting the picture quality Using the closed caption mode Base closed captions Digital CC Settings CC Selector Adjusting the audio Muting the sound Using the digital audio selector Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts Adjusting the audio quality Selecting the optical audio output fonnat.. etc. Care. and a satellite receiver ..Contents Important Safety Instructions Installation.... and Service Chapter 1: Introduction Features of your new TV Overview of steps for installing. a VCR.. Navigating the menu system 27 27 28 28 Chapter 5: Setting up your TV Setting the Energy Saving Mode Selecting the menu language TOSHIBA Logo LED Configuring the antenna input source for the ANT/CABLE terminal Programming channels into the TV's channel memory Programming channels automatically Manually adding and deleting channels in the channel memory Labeling channels Setting the HDMFM audio mode Viewing the digital signal meter. Using the Dolbl' Digital Dynamic Range Control feature Usin o the Locks menu En~ering the PIN code If you cannot remember your PIN code Changing your PIN code Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip) Downloading an additional rating system for blocking TV programs and movies Blocking channels Unlocking programs temporarily Using the input lock feature Using the GameTimer@ Using the control panel lock feature Using the PC settings feature Setting the PC Audio Settin~g the sleep timer Using REGZA-L1NK ® REGZA-L1NK0 playback device (DVD player.

• Digital Audio Out optical audio connection with Dolby® Digital optical output format (IrE page 45). • PC IN (Analog RGB) computer terminal (IrE page 19). • REGZA-LINK allows control of external devices from the TV remote via HDMI connection(1rE page 50). • HDMI new capability Lip-Sync Latency activates an audio/video display timing adjustment function that allows HDMI source devices to accurately perform synchronization automatically. etc. HBO.) on the screen along with the station numbers. • I080p output resolution.g. • Two sets of ColorStream® HD high-resolution component video inputs (IrE page 15). LCD TV: • Integrated digital tuning (8VSB ATSC and QAM) eliminates the need for a separate digital converter set-top box (in most cases). so you always know what you're watching (IrE page 31). • QSound® audio technologies (IrE page 52). • CableClear® digital picture noise reduction (IrE page 54). • Three HDMJTM digital. 9 .Features of your new TV The following are just a few of the many exciting features of your new Toshiba widescreen. high-definition multimedia interfaces I080p input support (IrE page 16). • Channel Labeling allows you to put the Call Letters (e. ABC. integrated HD.

I 10 . 14 For technical specifications and warranty 15 Enjoy your new TV' 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 page See "Learning about the remote control" (I@' page 21 ) for an overview of the buttons on the remote control. and using your new TV Follow these steps to set up your TV and begin using its many exciting features. refer to the Troubleshooting Guide. care. please unplug the power cords few seconds then re-plug to try again.' page 27). Inadeljuate ventilation may cause overheating. Chapter 8. see Chapter 9. 1 2 Carefully read the important safety. Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV (u. and service information. see Chapters 6 and 7.-]. Secure the TV to a wall.~' pages D-19).Overview of steps for installing. Program the remote control to operate your other devlce(s) (((i'\' pages 22-26). Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you have connected all cables and devices to your TV BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV learn the functions (. Keep this manual for flllure reference. pillar. information. 11 12 13 (o~' Program channels into the TV's channel memory page 30). Then press POWER on the TV control panel or remote control to turn on the TV If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV control panel and you cannot turn the TV off or on. or other immovable structure (I@\' page 4). Install the batteries in the remote control 20). • Place the TV in a location where light does not reflect on the screen. • Place the TV on the noor or a sturdy. • Place the TV far enough frol11 walls and other objects to allow proper ventilation. installation. AFTER connecting all cables and devices. setting up. 10 See "Menu layout and navigation" for a ljuick overview of navigating the TV's menu system (II§. level. For help. Observe the following when choosing a location for the TV: • Read "Important notes about your LCD TV" (u~\' page 7). (Irs" For details on using the TV's features. which will damage the TV THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA WARRANTY. plug in the power cords for your TV and other devices. the TV's connections and controls (1fM' pages I 1-12). stable surface that can support the weight of the unit.

these buttons change the channel (programmed channels only. ColorStream H01..Press to access the menu system (1& pages 27-28).Repeatedly press to change the source you are viewing (ANT/CABLE. TV front TV top Control panel 4SERVKJE ONLY 1 2 1. press and hold the POWER button on the TV control panel for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV... these buttons function as up/down/left! right menu navigation buttons. ColorStream H02.. 11 .When a menu is onscreen. POWER .. 1& page 30).These buttons adjust the 11 INPUT .. Used for updating the television's firmware.For service use only. 3 VIDEO-2 IN .. volume level.. CHANNEL A . HOMI 2..' ' 1 Green LED and TOSHIBA Logo LED Power LED(Green) = Power indicator TOSHIBA Logo LED= On or Off (1& page 28). ~ . 6 ARROWS A . HOMI1... HOMI 3. the MENU button on the TV's control panel functions as the ENTER button... .. 4 5 Service port . 10 VOLUME .Point the remote control toward this remote sensor (1& "Remote control effective range" on page 20).. 8 9 EXIT ..TV front and side panel controls and connections Model40RV525RZ is used in this manual for illustration purposes.The side panel AN connections are refened to as "VIDEO 2" and include standard AN connections. ~ .When no menu is on-screen. If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV control panel and you cannot tum off the TV. PC).Press to tum the TV on and off. 7 MENU (ENTER) . VIDEO 2. VIDEO 1.Press to instantly close an on-screen menu. When a menu is onscreen.. 2 Remote sensor .

8 Note: Standard (composite) video and S-video cables carry only video information. 5 2 6 Digital Audio OUT . ColorStream® HD-l and ColorStream® HD-2 . separate audio cables are required for a complete connection. ANT/CABLE .Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. 3 VIDEO-l IN .PC audio input terminals are shared with HDMI-I analog audio input terminals. and their use can be configured in the Audio Setup menu (u:w page 50). 4 Audio OUT Variable . or home theater system with optical audio input.High-Definition Multimedia Interface input receives digital audio and uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device or uncompressed digital video from a DVI device.For use when connecting a personal computer. A/V receiver.Analog audio outputs for connecting an audio amplifier. PC IN . the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. amplifier. see pages 14~20.Antenna input that supports analog (NTSC) and digital (ATSC) off-air antenna signals and analog and digital Cable TV (QAM) signals.Two sets of ColorStream® high-definition component video inputs (with standard stereo audio inputs) for connecting devices with component video output. separate audio cables are required for a complete connection. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.Optical audio output in Dolby Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) format for connecting an external Dolby Digital decoder. 1 TV back 1 HDMITM IN . HDMI.TV back panel connections For an explanation of cable types and connections. I 12 .Standard (composite) video and standard audio inputs plus optional S-video inputs for connecting devices with composite video or S-video output. such as a Toshiba DVD player with ColorStream®. HDMI connection is necessary to receive I080p signals. PCIHDMI-l (AUDIO) IN . 7 Note: Component video cables carry only video information.

separate audio cables are not required for a complete HDMI device connection (1& page 16 and page 19). HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) cable is for use with devices with an HDM! output. Separate audio cables are required for a complete connection. About the connection illustrations You can connect different types and brands of devices to your TV in several different configurations. For details on connecting and using your specific devices.) These cables are typically color-coded red. These cables (and the related inputs on your TV) are typically colorcoded according to use: yellow for video. Note: Component video cables provide better picture performance than a standard (composite) video or S-video cable. Note: An S-video cable provides better picture performance than a composite video cable. HOMITM cable (with HOMI Logo "HOml") O~ Coaxial (F-type) cable @)~~----- Coaxial (F-type) cable is used for connecting your antenna. The connection illustrations in this manual are representative of typical device connections only. be sure of connector types required by your devices and the length of each cable. Component video cables (red/green/blue) I~·---­ ~~ Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use with video devices with component video output. Before purchasing any cables. green. cable TV service. and white for stereo left (or mono) audio. Analog RGB (1S-pin) computer cable UJIIIW-------- i{D. and/or cable converter box to the ANT/CABLE input on your TV.== Analog RGB (IS-pin) computer cable is for connecting a PC to the TV's PC IN terminal (1& page 19). Separate audio cables are required for a complete connection. (ColorStream® is Toshiba's brand of component video. If you connect an S-video cable. Standard AN cables (red/white/yellow) -~----~~ ~ ~ Standard AN cables (composite video) usually come in sets of three. refer to each device's owner's manual. Note: HOMI cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite) video or S-video cable. 13 I . S-video cable ~~ S-video cable is for use with video devices with S-video output. and are for use with video devices with analog audio and composite video output. Optical audio cable [Q] cECJ::lto---Optical audio cable is for connecting receivers with Dolby Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) optical audio input to the TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (1& page 18). This cable carries both video and audio information. An HDMI cable delivers digital audio and video in its native format. and blue. The input/output terminals on your devices may differ from those illustrated herein. therefore. be sure to disconnect the standard (composite) video cable or the picture performance will be unacceptable.Overview of cable types Cables can be purchased from most stores that sell audio/ video devices. red for stereo right audio.

If you have a mono VCR. and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.:::. * * • S-video cable (if your VCR or camcorder has S-video) 00 not connect both types of video cable to VIDEO 1 at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable. see Chapter 3. if your camcorder has S-video.Connecting a VCR (or a VCR with S-video) and antenna. connect UMaNa on the TV to your VCR's audio out terminal using the white audio cable only To view the antenna or Cable signal: Select the ANTICABLE video input source on the TV.. if your VCR has S-video.. press INPUT on the remote control (1rW page 21). Select the ANTICABLE video input source on the TV.. you may not be able to use the remote control to program or access certain features on the TV. 00 not connect both types of video cable to VIDEO 1 at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable.u... Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV. use..For better picture performance. .. Use the Cable box controls to change channels. .. use an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard video cable.. ONLY I ~oo ~ _. connect an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) to VIDEO 1 on the TV back side instead of the VIDEO 2 on the TV side panel. and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries. The unauthorized recording. Note: When you use a Cable box.. '. To program the TV remote control to operate other devices. Cable TV or Camcorder Camcorder AUDIO From Cable TV or antenna From Cable TV l~ OUT ~ on TV right side panel r---. * To view basic and premium Cable channels: Turn OFF the VCR. DVDs. To view the VCR: Turn ON the VCR. * To view the camcorder video: Select the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV.: ~ SERVICE You will need: • coaxial cables • S-video cable ..~ .. videotapes. * Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever channel the Cable box output is set to). distribution.For better picture performance.ur-~=e~ I AUDIO ~E~l J :..-.. I 14 .. • standard audio cables (If you have a mono VCR or camcorder has S-video) To select the video input source.... or revision of television programs.

To program the TV remote control to operate other devices. * To view the DVD player: Turn ON the DVD player.. * To record a TV program while watching a DVD: Turn ON the VCR. . * To select the video input source. Select the ColorStream HD-2 video input source on the TV..For better picture performance. 1080i) scan systems. and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. and other materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries. The ColorStream HD-1 and HD-2 terminals can be used with Progressive (480p. use an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard video cable.. a VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.~----------Satellite receiver with component video L. Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source on the TV* to view the DVD. connect UMaNa on the TV to your VCR's audio out terminal using the white audio cable only • standard audio cables • component video cables . 720p) and Interlaced (480i...Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream® (component video). press INPUT on the remote control (1& page 21). Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source on the TV. distribution. DVDs. see page 16. Tune the VCR to the channel to record. and a satellite receiver Your TV has two sets of ColorStream® (component video) inputs.. or revision of television programs. connect a standard AN cable to VIDEO 2 on the side panel. videotapes.--. .If you have a mono VCR. If your OVO player has HOMI video. if your VCR has S-video.. use. * To view satellite programs using the component video connections: Turn on the satellite receiver. 15 I . The unauthorized recording. .3E>>-+-----I---._ _.. To view antenna or Cable channels: Select the ANT/CABLE video input source on the TV. Tune the VCR to the channel you want to watch.I You will need: • coaxial cables • standard NV cables . see Chapter 3.You can connect the component video cables (plus audio cables) from the OVO player or satellite receiver to either set of ColorStream terminals on the TV (HD-1 or HD-2). A 1080i signal will provide the best picture performance (1080p is not supported). * To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels: Turn ON the VCR.If your OVO player or satellite receiver does not have component video. 00 not connect both types of video cable to VIDEO 1 at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable..

* [1] EIA/CEA-861-D compliance covers the transmission of uncompressed digital video with high-bandwidth digital content protection. Conventional HOMI/OVI cable may not work properly . ~IW rn'JlJl)I--~ ~ 1 fr(-~ 10~\ '.HOMI cable transfers both video and audio. Supported Audio format: Linear PCM.11 48 kHz Note: To connect a PC to the HOMI input. Because this is an evolving technology. press INPUT on the remote control (~ page 21). the HOMIIogo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. and then the HOMlor OVI device. WXGA. or uncompressed digital video from a DVI (Digital Visual Interface) source device. 480i (60Hz). turn on the TV first. 2 3 -~ I ~ e BJ i I v@T@ '€~:·:m~ PC~ "IQ\. HDMI 2 or HDMI 3 video input source on the TV. .An HOMI-to-OVI adapter cable transfers video only Separate analog audio cables are required (see illustration). 16 .See "Setting the HOMfTMaudio mode" (1& page 32). To connect a DVI device. nop (60Hz). see Chapter 3. SVGA. you will need a Category 2 cable. turn off the HDMI or DVI device first.@'. . XGA.See "Setting the HOMITM audio mode" (1& page 34). * To select the video input source. The HDMI input can accept and display VGA. SXGA. the length of an HOMIto-OVI adapter cable should not exceed 9. • When turning off your electronic components.. To view the HDMI device video: Select the HDMI 1. For detailed signal specifications. The recommended length is 6. which is being standardized for reception of high-definition video signals.For proper operation. and then the TV. . it is possible that some devices may not operate properly with the TV. sampling rate 32/44. Note: To ensure that the HOMI or OVI device is reset properly it is recommended that you follow these procedures: • When turning on your electronic components.6 ft (2m). see page 59. 480p (60Hz). Separate analog audio cables are not required (see illustration). you will need: • one HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable (HDMI type A connector) per DVI device . HDMI. . To program the TV remote control to operate other devices. 1080i (60Hz) and I080p (24Hz/60Hz) signal formats.To display an 1080i/60Hz signal format.IQ\.@ @ HOml).For proper operation. you will need: • one HDMI cable (type A connector) per HDMI device .Connecting an HDMITM or DVI device to the HDMI input The HDMI input on your TV receives digital audio and uncompressed digital video from an HDMI source device. TV back panel HDmI . This input is designed to accept HDCP (HighBandwidth Digital-Content Protection) program material in digital form from EIA/CEA-861-Dcompliant[ll consumer electronic devices (such as a set-top box or DVD player with HDMI or DVI output). it is recommended that you use an HOMI cable with the HOMI Logo ( ~@!@ wr~ &:\ r@ '@ w· [Q] ~ """. • one pair of standard analog audio cables per DVI device .@ rr:\~ To connect an HDMI device. see page 19.8 ft (3m).

.HDMIIN .. you will need: • HDMI cables (1& page 16) Before controlling the device(s): • After completing the above connections. Toshiba is not liable for those operations. For an explanation of setup and operations. Hi:Jml 2 3 Playback device (REGZA-L1NK DVD player.) ~. see the operation manual for each device. • The connected devices must also be set.~" -8'-] ill To connect an Audio Receiver and Playback Devices.REGZA-LINK@) connection You can control the basic functions of connected audio/video devices using the TV's remote control if you connect a REGZA-LINK compatible audio receiver or playback device. REGZA-LINK feature may not operate properly. For details. However..~g4' II ill -' . • This feature is limited to models incorporating Toshiba's REGZA-LINK.) Playback device (REGZA-L1NK HD DVD player.. ). . TV back panel . 17 I . Refer to the individual instruction manuals for compatibility information. Note: This feature may not work properly depending on the devices that are connected.' . set the REGZA-liNK Setup menu as you desire (1& page 51).etc. • For proper operation... . Note: • If several devices are connected. • The REGZA-LINK feature uses the CEC technology as regulated by the HDMI standard. see pages 51..etc. it is recommended that you use HDMI cables with the HDMI Logo (HOm...

Connecting a digital audio system
The TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs a Dolby'()o1' DigitallIlD"?,,~?~ or 2-channel down-mixed peM (pulse-code modulation) signal for use with an external Dolby@ Digital decoder or other external audio system with optical audio input.

standard optical out signals may not work properly, creating a high noise level that may damage speakers or headphones THIS DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY • The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal may not output some digital audio sources because of copy restrictions.

You will need:
• optical audio cable (Use an optical audio cable that has the larger "TosLink" connector and not the smaller "m ini-optical" connector.)

*

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

o
TV back panel

o

Dolby Digital decoder or other digital audio system

Connecting an audio system
This connection allows you to use external speakers with an external analog audio amplitier to adjust the sound level.

. [i
L

@ . @.

L.INiJ'N Cj;;;;;:'" [Q]
R

AlJd'o IN

You will need:
• standard audio cables

.V;Io

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

o
TV back panel

o

Analog audio amplifier

o
'c<:~.=

o

To control the audio:

1 2

Turn on the TV and the digital audio device. Press MENU on the TV , s remote contro I anlI open tIle 0 Audio menu. Highlight Audio Setup and press @.

.-@T@~.'---.-.-. ~,-""-"1 ..
'@I@ ~m'"~b ©

:~I@ "fJ r@ @ @.
:OLOR

,c,'-J

3

L"@I@;@~.
ST~M SWM
COlOR
M R

1 T~ ~,._.L= I
~ R~~L~j

To control the audio:
Audio
Digital Audio Selector

Audio Settings Advanced Audio Settings

1 2

Turn on the TV and the stereo amplifier. Set up a optimum volume level of the stereo amplifier. Then you can adjust the sound volume level from the TV's volume control or the amplifier's volume control. Menu item of Speakers can turn to OFF to mute the TV's built in speakers.

4

In the Optical Output Format field. select either Dolby Digital or PCM, depending on your device (1l;;,"Selecting the optical audio output format" on page 44).
Audio Setup
PC Audio No

3

Audio
Digital Audio Selector Advanced Audio Audio Setup

HDMI 1 Audio MTS

Auto

Stereo
English

Dolby Digital
Dynamic Range Control Reset

Compressed

Done

Audio settings
Bass

10

o

Note: • Some audio systems may not be compatible with Dolby Digital bitstream signals Older audio systems that are not compatible with

Treble Balance

10

o
Reset

o o

Done

I 18

Connecting a personal computer (PC)
With either the PC IN or HDMI connection, you can watch your computer's display on the TV and hear the sound from the TV's speakers. I 2 3 4· 5 G B Reserved Reserved 6 7 8 9
10

Ground Ground Ground 5V Ground

II

12 13 14 15

SDA H-sync V-sync SCL

To connect a PC to the PC IN terminal on the TV:
When connecting a PC to the PC IN terminal on the TV, use an analog RGB (15-pin) computer cable and a PC audio cable.
TV back panel
1 2

"':;';'I':l
3

~

~

t3

To connect a PC to the HDMI terminal on the TV:
When connecting a PC to the HDMI terminal on the TV, use an HDMI-to DVI adapter cable and analog audio cables. If connecting a PC with an HDMI terminal, use an HDMI cable (type A connector). Separate analog cables are not necessary (~page 15).
TV back panel
, . - - - HOMIIN --~

:=-W-=;~==w',

~@'I@

y@T@.~--=l
J'(lg',b

'
<=1_ _----,

~@x@ ~~

@1!~

\([?)@ ';@ [@J--] ~:~~;o
~~r@ R@ ~

@I@-@t~_

Homl
2

~Jl

~

a

3

c:l2 II~I

----1IIIIllIl

PC audio

output

PC audio cable

Conversion adapter
(if necessary)

• To use a PC, set the monitor output resolution on the PC before connecting it to the TV. The PC IN terminal can accept and display VGA, SVGA, XGA, WXGA and SXGA signal formats. For detailed signal specifications (1& page 59). Other formats or non-standard signals will not be displayed correctly. • To display the optimum picture, use the PC setting feature (1& "Using the PC settings feature" on page 48).

PC audio

output

Note: • The PC audio input terminals on the TV are shared with the HOMI-1 analog audio input terminals (1& page 48). • Some PC models cannot be connected to this TV • An adapter is not needed for computers with a compatible mini O-sub 15-pin terminal. • Depending on the OVO'S title and the specifications of the PC on which you are playing the OVO-Video, some scenes may be skipped or you may not be able to pause during multi-angle scenes.

The HDMI input can accept and display VGA, SVGA, XGA, WXGA, SXGA, 480i (60Hz), 480p (60Hz), nop (60Hz), I080i (60Hz), and I080p (24Hz/60Hz) signal formats. For detailed signal specifications, see page 59.

Note: • The edges of the images may be hidden. • If receiving a 480i (HOM!), 480p (HoMI), 720p, 1080i, or 1080p signal program, Native mode scales the video to display the entire picture within the borders of the screen (i.e. no overscanning).

19

I

Preparing the remote control for use
Your TV remote control can operate your TV and many other devices such as cable converter boxes, satellite receivers, VCRs, DVD players, and HTIBs (home theater in a box), even if they are different brands.

• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with new ones. • When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones. Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in combination. • Always remove batteries from the remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an extended period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.

If you have a Toshiba device:
Your TV remote control is preprogrammed to operate most Toshiba devices (~page 24).

If you have a non·Toshiba device or a

Toshiba device that the remote control is not preprogrammed to operate:
You can program the TV remote control so it will operate the other device (~pages 22-26).

Remote control effective range
For optimum performance, aim the remote control directly at the TV and make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the TV.

Installing the remote control batteries 1 Remove the battery cover from the back of the
remote control.
Squeeze tab and lift cover.
r

Point remote control toward remote sensor on front of TV.

2

16.4 It (5m)

Install two "AAA" size batteries, making sure to match the + and - signs on the batteries to the signs on the battery compartment.

I

3

Reinsert the battery cover in. the remote control until the tab snaps.

Caution: Batteries must not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

Note:
• Be sure to use AAA size batteries. • Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area. • Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with applicable laws and regulations.

I 20

~. ~/.A T . 12 MUTE reduces or turns off the sound (1& page 43). 2 FREEZE freezes the picture. 5 Channel Numbers (0-9. ~) When a menu is on-screen. AUX 1. 19 MODE SELECT switch switches between TV. Full.Learning about the remote control The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here. 9 FAV BROWSER accesses the Favorites List in the Channel Brower™ (1& page 35).. 10 RECALL displays TV status information (1& page 52). ~ / .A T cycles through programmed channels when no menu is on-screen (1& page 30). The@button is used to tune digital channels (1& page 38) or to edit the Favorites List (1& page 36). Press again to restore the moving picture (1& page 41). (Also see "Arrow buttons. TheaterWide 1/2/3. (Also see. 18 EXIT closes on-screen menus. 4:3 HD.) 16 ENTER activates highlighted items in the main menu system. and AUX 2 modes (1& page 22). 13 INFO displays TV status information as well as program details. these buttons select or adjust programming menus. 8 VOL +.adjusts the volume level.") 15 Arrow buUons (. these buttons open the Channel Browser™ and tune to the previous/next channel in the channel history (1& page 36). ~ While watching TV. see the remote control functional key chart (I&' page 23). the green LED indicator on the TV front will be illuminated. when available (1& page 52). 4 PIC SIZE cycles through the picture sizes: Natural.. (") . For a complete list of the remote control's functions. -/100) directly tune channels. 3 SLEEP accesses the sleep timer (1& page 50).. Native and Dot by Dot (1& page 39-40). 11 CH RTN returns to the last viewed channel or source (1& page 38)... 17 MENU accesses the main TV menu system (1& pages 27 and 28). Set to "TV" to control the TV. Note: The error message "NOT AVAILABLE" may appear if you press a key for a function that is not available. When the TV is on. 1 POWER turns the TV on and off.I 14 . 7 CH. CABLE! SAT. 21 .-. 6 INPUT selects the video input source (1& page 34).

) 18 TVNCR To view one program while recording another. ~ Press to navigate DVD menus (may not work on some DVD players). 7 INFO Displays TV status information on-screen. 11 PLAY Begins playback of a tape or DVD.. • VCR._~~' . Point the remote control directly at the device.. (Press during play mode to view the picture moving rapidly forward. 9 ENTER Required by some satellite receivers and DVD players to activate certain functions. 10 OVD CLEAR Press to reset the title and chapter number.. 8 • T . 12 PAUSE Press during play or record mode to pause the picture. 1 POWER Turns the selected device on and off. 4 TOP MENU Accesses a DVD's top menu. to CABLE/SAT. "AUX I" to control a VCR. you must first program the remote control to recognize the device (if you have not already done so) (~pages 24-26). 17 REW Rewinds/reverses the tape or DVD. press again to restart. SEARCH selects a specific DVD chapter. 15 FF Fast-forwards the tape or DVD. "CABLE/SAT" to control a cable converter box or satellite receiver. 6 GUIDE Displays the channel guide in the CABLE/SAT mode.. • DVD player or HTIB. it may not operate certain features on any other devices. I 22 . or locates previous chapters. title or time. set the MODE SELECT switch switch to AUX 2. 2 Channel Numbers (0-9) Press to directly access channels (as opposed to (t. 20 MODE SElECT switch Set to "TV" to control the TV.. 3 +10 Press to directly access DVD chapters higher than 10.) l:£)). "AUX 2" to control a DVD player or HTIB.) 16 SKIP'" Skips back to beginning of current DVD chapter. 13 STOP Stops the tape or DVD. T For channels programmed into the channel memory (~page 30): • selects the next higher channel. To use your TV remote control to operate a: • Cable converter box or satellite receiver. 5 CH. 19 REC Starts tape recording. If this happens and you wish to use those features. 14 SKIP'" Skips forward to locate later DVD chapters. (Press during play mode to view the picture moving rapidly backward. cr.Using the remote control to control your other devices If you have a non-Toshiba device or a Toshiba device that the remote control is not preprogrammed to operate. you will need to use the device's original remote control. SET UP Accesses a DVD's setup menu in the AUX mode. press to select TV mode. set the MODE SELECT switch to AUX 1. set the MODE SELECT Note: Even after the TV remote control is programmed. T selects the next lower channel. TaU.

even though the remote control is in another mode. = key will affect the TV.Remote Control functional key chart Note: • U " = key does not send a signal in that remote control mode. FREEZE Digit 1-9 Digit 0 . Enter Menu up/down Menu left Display Enter Menu up/down Menu left Menu right DVDMenu DVD Clear Pause Play Stop Pause Play Stop Skip REV Skip FWD Rewind Fast FWD DVD search .(sub CH) TV/Video select FAVBROWSER DVD TOP Menu* Sound mute Guide* Volume up/down Channel up/down RECALL Previous channel DVD previous menu* Info -TV -TV -TV Digit 1-9 Digit 0 -TV -TV -TV -TV Digit 1-9 Digit 0 .(sub CH) -TV -TV -TV -TV Digit 1-9 Digit 0 100 -TV -TV -TV -TV Digit 1-9 Digit 0 +10 -TV Top Menu -TV -TV Channel up/down -TV -TV SAT Guide -TV Channel up/down -TV -TV -TV Channel up/down -TV -TV Setup -TV -TV DVD Return Info Select. • '~TV" • * Not available for your TV .' Menu right! Channel Browser™ Menu Exit DVD c1ear* Play* Stop* Skip REV* Skip FWD* Rewind* Fast FWD* Menu right Action Menu Exit Rewind Fast FWD TV/vCR 23 I .

• If the device does not respond to another code." If your VCR has this kind of switch and does not respond to the codes for your VCR brand.CABLE/ SAT (for a cable converter box or satellite receiver). write down the code(s) you used: Note: • In addition to POWER. For details on using the remote control to operate the device. 3 While holding down RE3LL. press the Channel Number buttons to enter the 3-digit code for your device.. use the device's original remote control. try each one separately until you find one that works. • These VCRs have a switch labeled "VCR1NCR2. To program your TV remote control to operate a oon-Toshiba device (or a Toshiba device that it is not preprogrammed to operate). • Every time you change the batteries. set the switch to the other position ("VCR 1" or "VCR2") and reprogram the remote control.SLOWREW* SLOWFWD* Angle* Sub title* Audio* Eject* DVDAngle DVD Sub title DVDAudio DVD Eject Programming the remote control to control your other devices Your Toshiba TV remote control is preprogrammed to operate most Toshiba devices. the device will turn off. 1 In the remote control code table (IrE page 25). turn on the device. . after trying all listed codes. • If the correct code was entered. repeat steps 1-4 using another code. 4 To test the code. or AUX 2 (for a DVD player or HTIB [home theater in a box]). follow the steps below. If. ··~~i-·--_ I 24 . confirm that all necessary keys on the TV remote control operate your device. the necessary keys do not operate your device. repeat the device code setup using another code (if other codes are listed for your device). See notes below. 6 For future reference. AUX I (for ~ VCR or TVNCR combo). If some keys are not operational. you will need to reprogram the remote control. • If the device does not respond. If more than one code is listed. I I 2 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the type of device you are programming the remote control to operate . see page 22. and press P~ER. Some newer VCRs respond to either of two codes. find the code for your device. point the remote control at it. 5 Remember to set the MODE SELECT switch back to "TV" to control the TV. you will need to use the remote control that came with the device.

030.062 Gemini 069.067._--_.062.052 015.106 025.082.059. 088.065 DVDNCR Combo Go Video lVC DVD=087. 096.096.089.013.081 Realistic 065 Recoton 102 Samsung 077.010.024.090 Stargate Sylvania 095.085 U.077. VCR=086 DVD player Aiwa Apex BOSE Broksonic Clarion Classic Daewoo Denon Emerson Fisher Funai GE Go Video GPX Hitachi JVC Kenwood Konka Magnavox Memorex Mintek NAD Nakamichi Norcent Onkyo Oritron Panasonic Philips Pioneer Proscan Qwestar RCA Sampo Samsung Sansui Sanyo Sharp Sherwood Sony Sylvania Teac Technics Techwood Toshiba Yamaha Zenith 006.096 Jasco 097 MotorolaiGU 062.080.030 008.039.022. 087.007.009.089 060 061.007.085. use the device's remote control. 103 ABC Vniden Zenith TVNCR Combo Action GE Goldstar Panasonic Precision Quasar Realistic Sony Toshiba Zenith Totevision 078 059.009.028.062.053 018.096.097.016 030 059 014.075.013 022. 103.045.053.011. DVD=089.051 057 027 008.094 Century 092 Citizen 090. Electronics 087. 033. 047.092.070 027 071 072 075 000. 100 TeleView 090 Texscan 100 Tocom 071.090 073 063.096.068. 079. 093.062 Radio Shack 092. 034.--.062 065 065 078 065 079 074 057 065 009.002. 092.041.017 097 018 019 020 021 022.005.067 074 011.009 004.--.076. 035.065. 050. Remote control codes __ ------------_.012._---------------_.098 Diamond 093 GE 061.045.023.--------.038 039 040 026 041 043 044 058 010. 072.087.082.098 United Cable 082 Universal 065.059 034 057 020.085 Starcom 069. 020.051 052.097 Contee 083.086. 004. 032.027 028 027 001. 088 037 008._-------- Wards 096 RCA Samsung Sanyo Zenith Satellite receiver Alphastar Chaparral DISH Network Drake Echostar Express Vu Fujitsu GE General Instruments Hitachi Hughes Hughes Network Systems Intersat JaneiI JVC Kenwood Magnavox Optimus Pansat Primestar Proscan Radio Shack RCA Realistic Samsung Sony Star Choice Star Trak STS Toshiba 038.030 087 031 005.--. 048. If this happens.042.009.088.097. 092 Pioneer 076.046.002.054.040. 078 079. 105 Sears 095 Signature 062 Signature 2000 096 Sprucer 081. 023.083.046.055 001.069.-----.043.098 Archer 065.095.-- --------~ ------.031.055 057.013 010.012._-_.026.097._------_.047.001.058 027 In some cases you may not be able to operate your device with theTV remote control.054 024 000.074.077 Proscan 061.101.082.050 004.104 Multi Canal 090 Novavision 101 Panasonic 081.056 021. VCR=083 DVD=090.084. VCR=085 DVD=092.042 008..096 Memorex 092. VCR=084 DVD=09I.066.003. .082.006. S.056 057. Your other device may use a code that is not recognized by the TV remote control.070. 080.023.044.049. 078. 084.098.037.092.092 Cable converter box 061. 068.085 Philco 087 Philips 066.--. VCR=081 DVD=088.057 029 060 058 036. 102.025 026.---------------_. 107 Magnavox 072.090 Scientific Atlanta 063.058 001.099 Cableview 064.063.099.032.099 RCA 064.013.070.029.094 Hamlin 093 Hitachi 062.071.092.091 064.031. VCR=082 Portable DVD player Aiwa 093 (continued) 25 I .015 016.081 014. 035 003.086.036.069.104 069.049 033 033 019 048 027 017. Jerrold 086.073.

065 Jensen 024. Realistic 018.007.068.014.025.031. 022.058.053.078.051.020. 025.037 Technics 036 Teknika 010. 075.031. 016.078 026.035.080 JBL 076 JC Penney 005. 037. 042.020.096.057 Daewoo 011. 022.043.025.065.065 073 009 005.033.067. 042.063. 039.028.011.027.064. 018. 061.074.025.057.056 Go Video 056. 054.069 Audiovox 010 Bell & Howell 007.073.048.063 020.057.071.029.010. 035.011. 009.011.010.099 098 VCR 049 019 018 003.072 005.054. 076.028.044.053. 068.050 lVC 005.009.065.023.010.081 Goldstar 005. 051.065.053 Wards 009.068.021.043.012.057.026.026.068.012.034.018.007.007.025.006.014.057.025.086 Sanyo HTIB Lasonic Panasonic Venturer 083 084 085 I 26 .011.008.071.009. 079.085 Scott 008.050.025.015 Proscan 001.037.006.039.063.062.063.051.025.027.057.063 Pentex Research 014 Philco 026.068 Broksonic 008. 031. 014.032.006.048.020.010.073 Garrard 018 GE 001.072 Panasonic 036.080 STS 035 Sylvania 018. 037. 039. 057.011. 053 Video Concepts 005. 014.034.095 024.Audiovox Panasonic RCA 094. 063. 056.035. 018.019.002.016.061.037.061 007.079 Pentax 012.035.070.084 Sansui 006.072 Symphonic 018.074. 031.014.044.024.067 Gradiente 018.014.004. 010.016. 023.046.043.079 Tandy 007 Tashiko 010 Tatung 037 Teac 018.009.053. 030.066 Shintom 004.054.046.021. 040. 064. 044.039 056 024.075.041.048 Proton 061 Quasar 045 Radio Shack 010.026.023.023.025.013.057 Pioneer 006.061 Signature 049 Signature 2000 075 Singer 047.020.077.021.037.079 Totevision Unitec Unitech Vector Research 009.062.028.063 Philips 026. 056.038.021.025.009.035.053. 065.024.049 Radix 010 RCA 001.049. 057. 064.011.063.045.038.020.016.082 Kenwood 005. 058. 073.002.010.075.010.041 Funai 018.018.006. 065.053. 014.055.079 White 073 Westinghouse XR-1000 018 Yamaha 005.002.039. 083 Realistic 007.015.045. 057.060.041.075.049.068.011.071.072.057.078 Daytron 078 Denon 063 Dimensia 001.009.050.072 Sears 007.067 007.063.079 Sharp 013.071.065 049 049 009. 024.061.017 Calix 010 Carver 026 CCE 019 Citizen 009.006.007.022.065 Radio Shack! 007.031.007.070 Nikko 010 Noblex 009 Optimus 010.037.024. 052.016.043.006.049.043.062.054.008.021.007.070.065 Optonica 031 Orion 054.079 Fuji 004. 065.065.049.035.055 Portland 012.048 Electrohome 010. 011. 056.003.012.024. 039.012. 079 Ricoh 047 Runco 034 Samsung 009.016.065 Toshiba 000.006.024. 073.022.032. 056.020.072 Fisher 007.012.065.079 Curtis Mathes 001.016.065.024. 061.060.031. 014.057.056. 018.013.018 005.012.068. 017.060.018.017.011.061.017.040. 070.056.068.056.028.053.043.027.049.053 Zenith 004.042. 009.010.066. 079 020.065 Harman Kardon 005 Hitachi 024.010. 071 Kodak 010 LG 010 Admiral Aiko Aiwa Akai Lloyds Logik LXI Magnasonic Magnavox Marantz Memorex MGA MGN Minolta Mitsubishi Montgomery Ward Motorola MTC Multitech NEC 053.015. 024.034.061 009. 030.037.065 Emerson 003.037.029.061 Sony 004.048.040. 047.012. 053.065. 028.057.073 Colortyme 005 Craig 009.069.032. 013.059.005.028.019.009.035. 066. 042.010.016. 055.012.006.010.051. 068.079 061 010 061.

Main menu layout The tables below and on the next page provide a quick overview of your TV's menu system.ais / Espanol [Opens the Channel Browser Setup menu] [Opens the REGZA-L1NK Player Control] Off / On [Opens the Edit Rating Limits menu] [Opens the Channels block menu] Off / Video / Video+ Off / On Off /30 min / 60 min /90 min / 120 min [Opens the New PIN Code entry screen] [Opens the Installation menu (1& page 29)] Enable REGZA-L1NK / TV Auto Input Switch / TV Auto Power/ Device Auto Standby / Speaker Preference [Opens the Sleep Timer menu] [Opens the PC Settings menu] Off/On Locks Enable Rating Blocking Edit Rating Limits Channels Block Input Lock Control Panel Lock GameTimer New PIN Code Installation REGZA-L1NK Setup Sleep Timer PC Settings Logo LED Setup o 27 I . press 0 MENU on the remote control or TV control panel. Icon Video "Jtem Mode Picture Settings Noise Reduction Game Mode Theater Settings Digital Audio Selector Audio Settings Advanced Audio Settings Audio Setup Option Sports / Standard / Movie / PC / Preference [Opens the Picture Settings menu] [Opens the Noise Reduction menu] Off / On [Opens the Theater Settings menul [Launches the temporary Audio Selector] [Opens the Audio Settings menu] --+ Audio [Opens the Advanced Audio Settings menu] [Opens the Audio Setup menu-I [Launches the temporary CC Selector] Preferences CC Selector Base CC Mode Digital CC Settings Input Labeling Channel Labeling Menu Language Channel Browser Setup REGZA-L1NK Player Control --+ Off/CCI /CC2/CC3/CC4/TI /T2/T3/T4 [Opens the Digital CC Setup menu] [Opens the Input Labeling menu] [Opens the Channel Labeling menu] English / Franc. To open the main menus (illustrated below).

This is not a sign of malfunction. which looks different from other menus. • The Video sub-menu appears with a black background. Press @ to save your menu settings or select a highlighted item. press O. select Installation. IOpens the Input Configuration menu] [Start] --+ lcol1 Terrestrial ··ltem"· Input Configuration Channel Program Channel AddlDelete Channel Tuning Mode Time Zone Signal Meter [Scans for new channels on ANT/CABLE] [Opens the Channel Add/Delete menu] Standard / Auto / Digital Pacific / Alaska / Hawaii / Atlantic / Newfoundland / Eastern / Central/Mountain [Opens the Signal Meter menu] System Status ·cz System Information [Opens the System Information screen] Navigating the menu system You can use the buttons on the remote control or TV control panel to access and navigate your TV's onscreen menu system. use the up/down/left/right arrow buttons ( . .. To open the Ins taII atIOn menu (Illustrated below). open the Setup menu. press 0 "· MENU on the remote contro) or TV control panel. depending on the signal the TV is receiving.. • • I 28 . • When a menu is open. ~) on the remote control or TV control panel to move in the corresponding direction in the menu. • Press 0 MENU • To close a menu JIlstantly.. which closes automatically after about 5 minutes. except the signal meter menu. to open the menu system. (A highlighted menu item appears in a different color in the menu...) All menus close automatically if you do not make a selection within 60 seconds.Setup/Installation menu layout The Installation menu contains the Terrestrial and System Status menus. and press 8. EXIT Note: • The menu background may sometimes appear black...

to select your preferred menu language and press ~ . or . <. Input Configuration Cancel Done I 4:lmi1'!l!!C-...:ic~.. highlight Input Configuration. . Auto li. ~ JH C :0-_ " Channel Browser Setup REGZA·L1NK Player Control • Fran9ais Espaiiol 5 To save your new settings." Selecting the menu language You can choose from three different languages (English. highlight Done and press 4 Press 0 EXIT to close the Preferences menu.. as shown below.:ais Espfiol On 2 Next. and press To select the menu language: 8../ . Channel Program 3 . or ~ to select the input source (Cable or Antenna) for the ANT/CABLE input on the TV. 29 .tl!JW!·m·i:l. the Menu Language. '" .) Open the Terrestrial menu.. . Highlight Logo LED and press ~.. To revert to your original settings.~Jl. For normal home lise.• • •I:tiIMljI!l1.•..tt~$ij'trJ Channel AddiDel~le Channel Tuning Mode Time Zone Signal ~eter Ten'lllltrial.. 8.~. ~ ". ~ . Setu. Fram. Configuring the antenna input source for the ANT/CABLE terminal To configure the ANT/CABLE input source: To use this TV for displaying in a retail showroom. press ~ to select Home and press 8. 3 8. or . the Energy Saving Mode setting window will appear. TOSHIBA Logo LED You can select TOSHIBA Logo LED either On or Off. and Energy Saving Mode windows will appear by default.. (ENERGY STAR® qualified"') Home 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Setup menu.. to select either On or Off and press From the Menu Language selection window.. 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Preferences menu. please select [Retail). French and Spanish) for the on-screen display of menus and messages.. highlight your preferred language and press 8. 8.Setting the Energy Saving Mode When you first turn on the TV.... Highlight Menu Language and press ~.P'. [Home] mode is recommended for normal home use. To select settings: 1 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Setup menu.. highlight Cancel and press 8.-~lrn Preferences 61 Off (JI 4 cc Selector Base CC Mode Digital CC Settings Input Labeling Channel Labeling Press . REGZA·lINK Setup Sleep Timer " Off PC Settings Logo LED 3 (A new set of Installation menu icons will appear.. Press. Highlight Installation and press 8. Press.. Please select a language.

Press 0 MENU 2 3 and open the Setup menu. press 0 on the remote control (or highlight Cancel in the onscreen display and press . EXIT 8).) Open the Terrestrial menu. (continued) I 30 . I or ~ to view the programmed channe s. After the channels are programmed automatically. if you have not already done so (1G'f page 29). To program channels automatically: Manually adding and deleting channels in the channel memory After automatically programming channels into the channel memory. To add or delete channels in the channel memory: 1 From the Setup menu. you can manually add or delete individual channels. Highlight Installation and press @. Terrestrial BHml!lD!!IUU III tIl Note: • You must configure the ANT/CABLE input source before programming channels (VIi page 29) • The automatic channel programming process will erases channels that were previously programmed into the TV's memory • To tune the TV to a channel not programmed in the channel memory. A new set of Installation menu icons will appear. you should not have to repeat the programming process again unless your Cable TV service lineup changes significantly The TV will automatically cycle through all the antenna channels. Follow the steps below to program channels into the TV's channel memory. please wait" appears (as shown above).Programming channels into the TV's channel memory When you press ICHI or ~ on the remote control or TV control panel. as shown below. highlight Installation and press @. 1 Configure the antenna input source. When channel programming is finished. and store all active channels in the channel memory. press (£I ICHI . once channel programming is finished. however. This is normal. you can manually add or erase individual channels in the channel memory. you must use the Channel Number buttons on the remote control. ~ ICHI Sleep Timer PC Settings Logo LED Off 4 (A new set of Installation menu icons will appear. While the TV is cycling through the channels. the message "Scanning channels. highlight Channel Program to bring up the Start and press programm ing. your TV will stop only on the channels you programmed into the TV's channel memory. • Programming channels when the ANT/ CABLE input is configured for Cable will take substantially longer than when the antenna input is configured for Antenna. @ again to begin channel Programming channels automatically Your TV can automatically detect all active channels in your area and store them in its memory. 5 To cancel channel programmJng.

5 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for other channels. To save your settings. T . To manually add digital subchannels on a physical channel: Use the Channel Numbers and the Dash ((!QQ) on the remote control to enter the channel number (for example. the following message will appear. If the desired channel label is not available from the list of presets. and then press @. If the channel is found.1 ~. Press . To remove encrypted channels from the channel memory: If an encrypted channel is accidentally added to the channel list by programming channels. To save your settings. The maximum number of labels that can be stored is 128. you can create a custom label. ~ to highlight No label and press 2 3 4 @. Press QS1 or ~ to select the channel you want to label. you can remove the unwanted encrypted (non-viewable) channel while you are channel surfing.2 Open the Terrestrial menu. and then highlight Done and press ABC ABCFAM ABCHD AMAX 1J. Digital Channel Is Encrypted . . You will be able to view and assign these logos from the Channel labeling window.) will be programmed into the TV.'-CO . etc. the number will be added to the list and the box will be checked. S. highlight Done and press 5 @.. CBS. '. and then press @ to check the box. Channel Labeling {No Label} A&E To revert to your original settings: Highlight Cancel and press S before saving. T . 56-I).. To remove all channels from the channel memory: Highlight Reset and press @. ~ to highlight the desired channel label and press S. If the desired channel label is not provided in the list. 3 4 To remove a channel from the channel memory: Highlight the checked box next to the channel number you want to remove.. a message will appear. highlightChannel Add/Delete. If the channel is not found. m (continued) 31 . you will be able to manually enter/edit labels using the software keyboard.. Press .Press 1on remote to remove channel To remove channel labels: 1 Open the Channel labeling window. To save your new settings: Highlight Done and press @. and then press @ to uncheck the box..-.. To assign channel labels: 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Preferences menu. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other channels... Press while the message is on the screen to remove the unnecessary channel from the channel list. Labeling channels A list of common channel labels (logos) for various channels (ABC. Press QS1 or ~ to select the channel for which you want to remove the label. I Custom S._-:: Pr95sCH uP)pOV/N:to c~~_/~~~moels. When you tune into an encrypted channel. Highlight Channel labeling and press The Channel labeling window opens.--J ". ". To add a channel to the channel memory: Highlight the unchecked box next to the channel number you want to add. highlight Done and press S.. Note: A video preview of the currently highlighted channel is provided to assist you in adding/deleting channels.

. Press (ti. 1 TOCDEFG 4 Highlight Done and press @ to save changes." the HOM/ 1 Audio setting is set to "Digital" and is grayed out in the menu.. Digital. or ~ to select HDMI1 Audio and then press . 4 To save your settings. Channel AddlDelete. The software keyboard will appear..To create and assign a custom label: 1 2 3 Open the Channel Labeling window.. the TV will automatically detect and output analog audio from the PC Audio input. If not. Audio Setup PC Audio AMC ANIMAL Clear All Done No Stereo English Dolby Digital Compressed 4 5 Repeatedly press the corresponding key on the remote control to highlight the desired character on the on-screen software keyboard. or Analog).. press @. if digital audio from the HOMI input is available. When viewing the HOMI I input.. When viewing the HOMI I input. (Also see item 7 on page 12 and "Setting the PC Audio" on page 49. Digital Channel Browser™. Assigned channel labels will be displayed in the banner. and go back to the Channel Labeling window. digital audio from the HOMI input will be output.. Highlight the label to be deleted and press window and press Chennel Labeling 2 3 GQQ). Setting the HDMITM audio mode To set the HDMI audio mode: Mto select a channel you want to Press .) See "Connecting an HOMI or DVI device to the HOMI input" (If:<i'C page 16).) Highlight Yes from the deletion confirmation @.. and Auto MTS Language Optical Output Format Dolby Digilal Dynamic Range Control Reset Done 6 7 8 When viewing the HOMl I input. Channels Block.. Note: Because the PC and HOMI-1 inputs share the same set of analog audio inputs. • TIMES TLe TMe TMCX TMCXw TMCw Ai I ~'thfitt~~~lab$t1:'l _ _:::J!!fIfJ'& TNT TNTHD Custom Clear All Done . . it will be output.) or label. (Auto is the recommended mode. the PC Audio menu setting influences the HDM/1 Audio menu setting. I 32 . to highlight Custom and press @.. or after a two-second pause. Highlight the new custom label and press @ to assign. press" key. Press . " the HDM/ 1 Audio setting changes to "Auto. Channel Labeling 1 Press 0 MENU and open the AudiO menu. ~ . The highlighted character is entered after you either press a different key. or . analog audio from the PC Audio input will be output. to select the HOMI I audio mode (Auto. If PC Audio is set to "No.. When finished. highlight Oone and press @. 2 3 Highlight Audio Setup and press @. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have entered all desired text. To delete the custom label: Analog 1 Open the Channel Labeling window." If PC Audio is set to "Yes... New labels will be added to the list in alphabetical order and marked with an icon I to indicate that they are custom.

. 8. After the time zone has been set. and press Press" or 8. and press Factory Defaults.Viewing the digital signal meter You can view the digital signal meter in the ANTI CABLE digital TV input source only. After the TV turns off. you will be asked to set the current Daylight Saving Time status. highlight Installation and A new set of Installation menu icons press will appear. and press 8. T . 8. 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Setup menu. This feature will allow the TV status information to show the correct time zone information (I@" page 52). highlight 8. Highlight Yes and press The TV will turn off automatically after a few seconds. Reset Factory Defaults To reset all settings and channels to their factory default values: Setting the time zone The Time Zone setup will allow you to specify the correct time zone for your region. 'Y to select the region. 33 I ... 8. ~ to select the antenna input and digital channel whose signal you want to check.. To return to normal viewing: Press O. • Support Information is for 32RV525RZ.. Press .. 1 From the Setup menu.. 40RV525RZ.. 37RV52RZ. 5 6 2 3 Highlight Time Zone Setup. To set the time zone: Information.. 37RV52RZ. or ~ to select Yes or No. 40RV52R and 46RV525R. To cancel the reset: Highlight No and press To set the Daylight Saving Time status: 1 Press . highlight System Meter.. 2 3 4 Highlight Installation and press A new set of Installation menu icons will appear. • The signal strength does not change between virtual channels on the same physical channel Note: • Sotware Version is for 40RV525R. highlight Signal A new set of Installation menu icons wi II appear.. and press 8. Note: • The physical digital channel number listed in the Signal Meter screen may not correspond to a virtual TV channel number Contact your local broadcasters to obtain the RF channel numbers for your local digital stations. Open the System Status menu. unplug the TV power cord and then plug it in again to complete the reset process. Highlight Installation and press 8. and then press @... 40RV52RZ and 46RV525RZ To close the screen and return to the Installation menu: Highlight DONE and press EXIT To close the screen and return to the Terrestrial menu: Highlight Done and press EXIT 8. highlight Done.. 8. Done. 37RV525RZ. To return to normal viewing: Press O. Press . Highlight Installation and press 8. Open the System Status menu. 3 4 A new set of Installation menu icons will appear. Viewing the system status To view the system status: To view the digital signal meter: 1 2 3 4 Press 0 MENU and open the Setup menu. and then press 8. Press . 1 Press 0 MENU and open the Setup menu. highlight System 8. ~ to scroll through the menu bar to select the Sotware Version or Support Information and view the related information. Information. ~ to scroll through the menu bar to select Enter your PIN code (or 0000 if no PIN code has been set). Open the Terrestrial menu.

3 Audio Receiver Player Recorder (continued) I 34 . The current signal source displays in the top right corner of the Input Selection screen. from the following preset list of labels: I(j) ANT/CABLE o Video 1 6 8 Video 2 o ColorStream H02 o HOM I 1 Iim'fa!Illll o HOMI2 o HOM I 3 Q PC ColorStream H01 (j) .2 HDMI1 . To label the video input sources: If a REGZA-LINK device with HDMI 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Preferences menu. or c) Repeatedly press ~ on the remote control or TV control panel to change the input. the REGZA-LINK icon will appear.1 HDMI1 . If the connected CEC device has any connected devices. • "No Video Signal" will appear randomly on the screen if no signal is received in video input mode. • If CEC device is connected to a HOMI input. or HOMI 3. and then press O. Labeling the video input sources You can label each video input source according to the type of device you connected to each source. EXIT 1 Press ~~ on the remote control or TV control panel.. Audio Receiver) is connected to the HDMI input: Press ~ on the remote or TV control panel repeatedly to highlight HOMI1.(default label) Audio Receiver Cable Compact Disc DTV DVD Game Console HDMl Switch (HDMl inputs only) Laser Disc Satellite/DSS VCR Video Recorder Hide (to hide an unused input in the Input Selection screen and in the Channel Browser™ Inputs list) Note: If you select PC in the Input Selection screen. • • • • • • • • • • • • • . you will have to press @ to actually select a particular device from the popup window. some REGZA-LINK devices may automatically turn on.-".g. I HOMI 1 . a separate device selection popup window will appear. 2 Note: • When selecting REGZA-LINK input sources from the popup window using ~~. "Game Console". • When selecting input sources using .or b) Repeatedly press'" T on the remote control and then press @ to change the input. Highlight Input Labeling and press @. And then either: a) PressO-7.Selecting the video input source to view To select the video input source to view: Press ~~ repeatedly to highlight the desired input source. or "Hide" as the label. switching capability (e. ~.. you can choose only ". Q I CIllD to Select 8 Navigate Note: • You can label the video input sources according to the specific devices you have connected to the TV (~ "Labeling the video input sources" at right). • Sources can be "hidden" (~ "Labeling the video input sources" at right).. HOMI 2.

highlight 5 Reset and press @. The screen below right is an example of how you could label the inputs if you connected a VCR to VIDEO I. • Keep a history of the last 32 channels or inputs viewed.. 0 I «m 10 select" Navigate Input Selection screen with all inputs labeled except input 4. ColorStream H D 2 HOMI1 HOM I 2 HOMI3 PC Reset 4 Press ~ or ~ to select the desired label for that input source.3 Press'" or T to highlight the video source you want to label. which means that input will be skipped over when ~~) is pressed. To clear the input labels: To set up the Channel Browser™: Browser Setup and press @. ~. 2 Press'" to highlight Navigation. Input labeling example: The screen below left shows the default Input Selection screen (with none of the inputs labeled as a specific device). and then press ~ or ~ to select either Browse Mode or Select Mode. • Quickly select REGZA-LI K devices from the REGZA-LINK List. o . The channell input will be removed from the Favorites list. Keep a list of your favorite channels (see "Favorites Browser. which has been hidden. which will cause that input to be "grayed out" in the Input Selection screen and skipped over when you press ~) on the remote control. • Quickly surf and tune your recently viewed channels/inputs from the Channel BrowserI'M History List (illustrated on the next page). a video recorder to ColorStream HO I. VCR Cable . you can select Hide as the label. Also note that the ColorStream H02 input is labeled "Hidden". If a particular input is not used. ~ . Cable TV to VIDEO 2. a OTV set-top box to HOMI I. 1 2 3 1 Press 0 to open the Favontes browser list. Input Labeling Video 1 Video 2 Color Stream HO 1 Tuning channels Tuning channels using the Channel Browser™ The Channel Browser™ provides an easy navigation interface for all your channels and inputs. Press and hold FAV BROWSER 0 for 3 seconds.- . and a satellitefDSS set-top box to HOMI 2. Ie MHOASI. From the Preferences menu. 1 2 3 Press 0 MENU and open the Preferences menu." below). Highlight the channel or input to delete by pressing :. (continued) 35 I . o Video 1 €t E) Video 2 HDMl 1 () HDM12 o ColorSlrcam HD2 o ColorStream HDl o VCR e Cable €t Video Recorder o . To revert to the factory default labels. @. highlight Channel FAV BROWSER . highlight Done and press@. Highlight Input Labeling and press Highlight IReset and press @. Press and hold (100) for 3 seconds. o DTV ~ SatellitclDSS Note: Additions are added to the beginning of the Favorites list on the left side of the Channel Browser™ To delete a favorite channel/input: o HDMI3 o PC (1) • Q I 6 o PC DVD 4D to Select" Navigale Input Selection screen with no inputs labeled. ".. This feature allows you to: • • Navigate the contents of all of your inputs. • Quickly change inputs from the Inputs List. To add a favorite channeVinput: 1 2 Tune to the channel or input. To save the new input labels. ~ or (..E 10 ANfiCASlf Favorites Browser The Favorites Browser allows you to quickly set up a favorite channels/inputs list that is integrated into the Channel BrowserI'M. and a OVO player to HOMI 3. • Surf via Browse mode (to immediately tune channels as you highlight them in the Channel BrowserI'M) or Select mode (to surf over channels in the Channel BrowserI'M before you select one to tune).

Will have no effect.. Favorites... Press 1 Current list (History... Press d:iJ . ANT/CABLE. Favorites.. highlight Reset and press@... to surf forward through the channel History... To open the Channel Browser™: • • Press ~ . BACK. ANT/CABLE...... or the favorite channelslinputs in the Favorites list... and then press . ~IT BACK NEXT .... To toggle among the available lists: After opening the Channel BrowserH1 ... FAV BROWSER _ ...... it will be highlighted and the TV will automatically tune to the channel or input.. then press . press. or d:iJ . or d:iJ . to open the Channel Browser™ and surf back to a previous item or surf forward to the next item in the list.. on the remote control.. the Inputs list. or ~ to select T to highlight REGZA-L1NK List. the REGZA-LINK devices in the REGZA-LINK list.. the REGZA-LINK list. . press ~ .... NEXT . or REGZA-lINK) 2 Input type 3 Channel or input currently being viewed 4 Channel or input that is currently highlighted in the browser 5 Channels stored in the History List 6 Channel labels Note: History List will be cleared every time the TV is powered off.. or ~ to select the setting you preteI': either On. or ~ to select On or Off. Press ~ .. and REGZA-L1NK.. • If all lists are turned off.... T to toggle among History. ~K.. Note: • The Channel Browser™ opens in History List by default.. 2 -- I 36 . the inputs in the Inputs list. Note: REGZA-LINK List will be automatically grayed out and set to Off when Enable REGZA-LiNK is switched to Off. pressing:. the channels in the ANT/ CABLE channel list. the ANT/CABLE channel list... • Pressing FAV BROWSER will bring up the Channel Browser™ Favorites list regardless of the last selected list in the Channel Browser™ FAV BROWSER o . or Off. NEXT .... the Channel Browser™ will open in the last selected list.... To tune to a channel or input in Browse mode: 1 • While watching TV. ~. or ~ to select On or Off.. Once another list has been selected. <lilli. Inputs. Press Press press .tiO!l History List ANT/CABLE List Inputs List Favorites List REGZA-L1NK List Reset On On On On Off Done Elements of the ChannelBrowser™ 1 2 3 4 3 T to highlight History List.Channel Browser Setup • ~ig.. 4 5 Press T to highlight ANT/CABLE List.... highlight Done and press @. (See 'To set the REGZA-LINK Setup" on page 51 for more information) 8 To save your entries. . T to highlight Inputs List. or 0 Will not display the Channel Browser™ If Favorites List is turned off. or the favorite channels/inputs in the Favorites list. Inputs. To return to factory defaults. and then press .. or 6 7 T to highlight Favorites List. to surf backward through the prevIOusly tuned 32 channels in the History list. or ~ to select Press On or Off.... when you stop on an item in the Channel Browser™. and then press . In Browse mode. Press 0 to close the Channel Browser lM ... and then On or Off.

Previously tuned channels/inputs are "shifted" to the left. but instead is moved to the end of the list on the right side of the Channel Browser™. but the Favorites List will be saved. .) . The Channel BrowserTl\! will store the following channels: • All channels that are tuned using the numeric buttons on the remote control. . Any channel or input that is tuned repeatedly will not be repeated in the History List. eventually moving otf the left side. the oldest item will be removed from the list when a new channel or input is tuned. Description Both analog and digital channels can be tuned normally Digital channels will have priority when manually entering a channel number using the Channel Number (0-9) on the remote control.. the Channel Browser™ adds it to the History List and displays it on the "right side" of the Channel Browser™. Press jg. to select your desired mode. to tune the TV to the highlighted 2 3 Press 8 ~IT Mode' . or C§J ~ to open the Channel Browser™ and surf back to a previous item or forward to the next item in the list. Note: Note: Whenever an item is selected that cannot be tuned (for various reasons). . (Channel Add/Delete will not have anything listed until a scan is done. Standard Press 0 Adding and clearing channels and inputs in the History List Adding channels and inputs to the History List: As a channel or input is tuned. BACK Auto (default) ®... • The Channel Add/Delete & Channels Block windows as well as the Channel Browser ANT/ CABLE list will be updated automatically when you change the mode..) 37 I . the TV will automatically tune to the previously viewed channel or input. " .'. and then press ~ and . Open the Terrestrial menu. Digital Only digital channels can be tuned Note: Digital mode will be most useful after analog channels are shut down by the government in 2009. Also. the History List will be cleared. Note: See page 29 for details on configuring the antenna input. the Input Configuration must be set to Antenna (1& page 29). ~ ~ 8 Note: To use this feature. • All channels that are tuned usi ng r£) or ~ on the remote control. The channel tuning mode has three options. • Even if the Channel Tuning Mode is set to Digital. ... to tune the TV to the highlighted item.To tune to a channel or input in Select mode: Setting the Channel Tuning Mode This feature allows you to choose how tuning will be handled for analog and digital channels when the TV is in Antenna mode. • Turning off the TV will clear the History List. to close the Channel Browser lM . highlight Installation and press A new set of Installation menu icons will appear. ]n Select mode. To set the Channel Tuning Mode: 1 2 From the Setup menu. press jg. 8. it will be highlighted but you must press item. analo?c~~annelscan still be tuned by r£) / if available .) .. analog channel 3 will still be the default channel to prevent the initial case where no digital channels have been found in prior channel scans. • Once 32 channels or inputs are stored in the History List. Clearing channels from the History List: • Reconfiguring the ANT/CABLE input will clear the History List. to surf backward through the previously tuned channels/inputs. highlight Channel Tuning Mode. when you stop on an item in the Channel BrowserHt. 1 While watching TV.

2. Switching between two channels using Channel Return The Channel Return feature allows you to switch between two channels without entering an actual channel number each time. 1 2 Press PIC SIZE 0 on the remote control. For example. CH RTN tllne only. followed by the dash (GQQ») button and then the sub-channel number.the TV will switch back and forth between the last two channels that were tuned. o . Once you press 0 and then change channels again.Tuning to the next programmed channel To tune to the next programmed channel: Press ICHI or ~ on the remote control or TV control panel. I. FOJ·. and when you press will be tuned. then@. 4:3 HD. While the Picture Size screen is open. Tuning digital channels: Press the Channel Number (0-9) on the remote control. The TV will return to the memorized channel one . to select digital channel 125-1. so you can return to that channel quickly from any other channel by pressing CH R T N . Note: If a digital channel is not programmedeither through the automatic channel scan (1& page 30) or the channel add/delete function (u:? page 31 )-you will have to tune the RF channel using the Channel Number and dash (C1QQ)) on the remote control. TheaterWide 2. to select channel 125. Native. by switching back and forth between the last two channels that are tuned. Select a second channel using the Channel Number buttons (and the dash (GQQ») button if selecting a digital channel). Press CH RTN 2 3 To select the picture size using the remote control: 0 on the remote control. The channel has been programmed to the button. 1 Tune the TV to the channel you want to program IIlto the . Selecting the picture size You can view many program formats in a variety of picture sizes-Natural. TheaterWide 3. CH RTN channe I wIll dIsplay. 5. . -. CH RTN T while the Picture Size screen is (continued) I 38 . ae tIme you press 0 . • Press" or open. you can do one of the following to select the desired picture size: • Repeatedly press 0 . Tuning to a specific channel (programmed or unprogrammed) Tuning analog channels: Press the Channel Number (0-9) on the remote control. CH RTN 0 . and Dot by Dot (available in PC Mode Only). 2. Full.This feature also works for external inputs. The prevIous . 2 Press and hold CHOTN for about 2 seconds until the message "Memorized" appears on-screen. then S. press I. You can save separate picture size preferences for each input on your TV. PIC SIZE Note: If you press 0 from a non-antenna input. TheaterWide 1. press I. the CH RTN memory will be cleared and the button will function as Channel Return.example. the TV will return to the last-viewed input. Select the picture size that displays the current program the way that looks best to you. Note: The "picture size" illustrations are examples only The format of the image (in any of the picture sizes) will vary depending on the format of the signal you are currently watching. • Press the corresponding Number button (0-6) while the Picture Size screen is open. E h . CH Rm To memorize a channel to the 0 button: Note: This feature will not work unless you program channels into the TV's channel memory (IG)' page 30). CH RTN 0 button.. (4'\ I~HI Switching between two channels using SurfLock™ The SurtLock lM feature temporarily "memorizes" one CH RTN channel to the 0 button. CH RTN 0 3 You can then change channels repeatedly. 5.the memOrized channel . 1 Select the first channel you want to view.

To view the hidden edges.e. (con! i nued) 39 I . Natural IOOOHOOO! 000 000 • If receiving a squeezed 4:3 format program.. "OCUtf a 0 0 000 ."t1CIlLIf. Note: Some of the picture sizes may not be available depending on the receiving signal format (those will be "grayed out" in the Picture Size screen).. but the left and right edges are stretched wider to fill the screen. but not stretched taller. TheaterWide 1 (for 4:3 format programs) 1000HOOOI 000 000 The center of the picture remains close to its original proportion. and 1D8Dp program sources only) 000 000 Picture is not distorted from original size. Highlight Done and press TheaterWide 2 (for letter box programs) 3 8.. 48Dp] source programs only) 00°lq 000 1 000 000 Some program formats will display with sidebars and/or bars at the top and bottom. and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. 1D8Di. TheaterWide 3 (for letter box programs with subtitles) ooo~o . Full (for 16:9 [48Di. the top and bottom edges of the picture (including subtitles or captions) may be hidden. _ The top and bottom edges are hidden*.. the picture is stretched wider to fill the width of the screen. • None of the picture is hidden.. changing the height! width ratio) for any purpose other than your private viewing may be prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries.' .Size>. Using these functions to change the picture size (i.. 000 -I . or ~ to select the desired picture size setting. 1 2 Select Picture Size in the Theater Settings menu. Press . Note: If you select one of the TheaterWide® picture sizes. loooHOOOI 000 000 The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden*. 4:3 HD (for 72Dp. either scroll the picture (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only) or try viewing the program in Full or Natural picture size.To select the picture size using the menus: j/Pictufe..

or VGA (60Hz) signal from the HDMI1/2 input The "Dot by Dot" picture is non-scaling display. XGA.ij • 000 001 • If receiving a 4S0i (HDMl). no overscanning). and 720p). or IOSOp signal program. 720p.. and 480i). nop. Depending on the input signal formats. Note: The auto aspect ratio feature is not applicable to PC input. 72Dp. and SXGA sources only) Using the auto aspect ratio feature When the auto aspect ratio feature is set to On. or noisy 6 Press . displayed in black. 720p. Highlight Theater Settings and press 8. 1D8Di. I 080i. and 1D8Dp signal programs) 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Video menu. Press T to highlight the Picture Scroll field. I080i. 480p. or HD2 input • A 480i. I 40 . WXGA. I080i digital signal from the ANT/CABLE input • A 4S0i signal from the VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 input • A 480i signal from the ColorStream HD1. 48Dp (HDMI). 480p. Not defined (no The current picture size you ID-I data or set under "Selecting the HDMI aspect data) picture size" on page 38.. 4S0p (HDMI). see below "Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture". To revert to the factory defaults. ColorStream (1080i and 720p). the border of the picture may be hidden. Note: • This mode is supported only for HOMI (1080p.. . 480p. the TV will automatically select the picture size when one of the following input sources is received: • A 4S0i. SVGA. 1080i. select either TheaterWide 2 or TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other mode). This is especially useful for external HD sources such as DV HS movies.e. 4:3 normal 4:3 letter box Natural (with sidebars) TheaterWide 2 Full 16:9 full Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only) You can set separate scroll settings for the TheaterWide 2 and TheaterWide 3 modes for each input. 3 4 5 In the Picture Size field. picture is displayed with sidebars and/or bars at the top and bottom. highlight Done and 8. Dot by Dot (for VGA. To save the new settings. (Example: VGA input source) * To view the hidden areas (such as subtitles or captions). or ~ to scroll the picture up and down as needed. and ANTI CABLE (digital) inputs (1080p. press Note: When receiving a signal at 480i resolution.1080i. I080p. 720p. Native mode scales the video to display the entire picture within the borders of the screen (i. highlight Reset and press 8.To set the scroll settings: Native (for 48Di (HDMI). the picture scroll function may have limited adjustment range. P(TCl~IO tLo.. or PC graphics.. • Depending on the input signals.

3 Press . In the Auto Aspect Ratio field. highlight Reset and press 2 Highlight Mode and press 8. Note: If the TV is left in FREEZE mode for more than 15 minutes. . press 0 again (or any other button). Picture Settings Noise Reduction To set the Cinema Mode to Video: Select Video in step 3 above. To revert to the factory defaults. .. select Film.. 2 3 4 Highlight Theater Settings and press @.To turn on the auto aspect ratio feature: 1 Press 0 MENU and open the Video menu. press 0 to make the picture a still picture. Using the FREEZE function for any purpose other than your private viewing may be prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries. To save the new settings.. VIDEO 2. to select the picture mode you prefer and press 8. the FREEZE mode will automatically be released and the TV will return to moving picture. To select the picture mode using the menu system: In the Cinema Mode field. 41 . highlight Done and press 1 Press 0 MENU and open the Video menu. 8. @. Standard Movie . PC Preference Note: The picture mode you select affects the current input only You can select a different picture mode for each input. highlight Done and press @. select On. To turn off the auto aspect ratio feature: Select Off in step 3 above. h FREEZE Wh en vIeWIng t e TV. . or HDMI inputs on the TV. Adjusting the picture Selecting the picture mode You can select your desired picture settings from four different modes. Using the FREEZE feature To use the FREEZE feature: Game Mode Theater Settings ON 1 2 . To revert to the factory defaults. highlight Reset and press @. Mode· Sports Standard ··fictureQualiij Bright and dynamic picture (factory setting) Standard picture settings (factory setting) Lower contrast for darkened room (factory setting) Designed for viewing of PC tables and documents Your personal preferences Selecting the cinema mode When you view a DVD (3:2 pulldown processed) from a DVD player connected to the VIDEO 1. ColorStream HD-2 (component video). Movie PC Preference To set the Cinema Mode to Film: (available for 480i and I080i signals) Note: PC mode is available for HOMI and PC inputs only (grayed out for other input sources). . ColorStream HD-l. To save the new settings. Highlight Theater Settings and press @.. smoother motion can be obtained by setting the Cinema Mode to Film. FREEZE To return to the moving picture.. 1 2 3 4 Press 0 MENU and open the Video menu. and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. as described below.. or .

or T to select the picture quality you want to adjust (Contrast. Using the closed caption mode Base closed captions The closed caption mode has two options: • Captions-An on-screen display of the dialogue.Adjusting the picture quality You can adjust the picture quality (Contrast. Backlight. Contrast Backlight* DynaLight** Brightness Color Tint Sharpness lower darker On/Off darker paler reddish softer higher lighter On/Off lighter deeper greenish sharper To view captions or text: 1 2 3 Press 0 MENU and open the Preferences menu. and then press . Color. Tint. Note: If text is not available in your area. 1 2 3 Press 0 MENU and open the Video menu. T3." above left) as a starting point for adjusting the picture settings. T2. this will automatically be set to O. To save the new settings. Highlight Picture Settings and press 8. DynaLight H " Brightness. (Settings are stored in memory. • To view captions: Highlight CC1. Color. Backlight. CC2. or CC4.. • Text-An on-screen display of information not related to the current program. Press. narration. Tint. If this happens. CC3. such as weather or stock data (when provided by individual stations). Highlight Base CC Mode and press ~. Press.. as described in the table above.." above left) until Reset is selected. (CC1 displays translation of the primary language in your area. . or Sharpness). a black rectangle may appear on screen. highlight (1l2lJ~ Note: If the program or video you selected is not closed captioned.) To adjust the picture quality: Giant pandas eat leaves. set the Base CC Mode to Off. and Sharpness) to your personal preferences. The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the Preference mode (1& "Selecting the picture mode. • To view text: Highlight T1. or ~ to adjust the setting. Reset and press 8. 4 8. or T to select the desired closed caption * Backlight This feature adjusts the brightness of the entire screen. DynaLight. • When a videotape has been dubbed • When the signal reception is weak • When the signal reception is non-standard I 42 . Brightness. Note: A closed caption signal may not display in the following situations. • To turn off the closed caption mode: Select Off in step 3 above. highlight Done and press You can use any of the picture modes "Selecting the picture mode.) ** DynaLight This function automatically strengthens the black coloring of dark areas in the video according to the level of darkness. mode and press 8. no captions will display on-screen. To revert back to the base mode that you began adjusting the picture settings from. and sound effects of TV programs and videos that are closed captioned (usually marked "CC" in program guides). or T4. When in video mode and no signal is input.

Black. or ~ to select the desired service. type. Magenta. Green. When such services are not available. Each time you press MOE. None. Right Drop shadow Auto. Magenta. Mono w. Cyan If the closed caption mode is set to Off when you select "MUTE" mode. Solid Opacity Background Color Auto..Digital CC Settings You can customize the closed caption display characteristics by changing the background color. Translucent. Uniform. Cyan Adjusting the audio Muting the sound Press 0 on the remote control to partIally reduce (1/2 MUTE) or turn off (MUTE) the sound. or. Green. Translucent. Left Drop Shadow. To save the new settings. Note: • This feature is available for digital channels only • You cannot set the Caption Text and Background as the same color. use ~ to set the volume to O. This temporarily overrides the audio rrack chosen by the language option under Audio Setup (1& "Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts" on page 44).. Raised. Transparent. Transparent. Press EXIT o. Depressed. Magenta. Cyan Using the digital audio selector You can use the Digital Audio Selector to conveniently switch between audio tracks on a digital channel (for those channels that have multiple audio tracks). Black. Caption Size Caption Text Type Caption Text Edge C 1/2 Mute --+ Mute --+ Volume --+~ Caption Text Color Text Foreground Auto. • Mode) for a particular channel. Default. S. Casual. the closed caption setting will automatically change back to the current Base CC Mode setting. To revert to the factory defaults. and then press .. Serif. Cursive. and then press . opacity. Red. See "Using the closed caption mode" (1& page 42) for more information on closed caption modes. White. Black. Blue. Flashing. Serif. However. once you (continued) 43 I . highlight Reset and press S. w/o Serif. Prop. Auto. Red. Green. To mute the audio without automatically activating the closed caption feature. highlight Done and press Press. Text Background Auto. 3 4 3 4 Press. Large Auto. Standard. Small. or ~ to select the format for that characteristic (see table below). Prop. Yellow. the CC Selector presents a default list of services. White. Mono w/o Serif. w. or • to select Closed Caption. change to another analog channel. the next best service will be used instead .. Blue. Flashing. Highlight Digital CC Settings and press S. the mute mode will change in the following order: MUTE . Solid Opacity Caption Text Edge Color Auto. Highlight CC Selector and press S. Yellow. CC Selector You can use the CC Selector to temporarily override the default analog caption mode (set in Base CC To use the digital audio selector: 1 Press 0 MENU and open the AudiO menu. Small Capitals Auto.. the closed caption feature is automatically activated if the TV program is Closed Captioned. You can also use the CC Selector to select digital closed caption services (if available). to highlight the characteristic you want to change. To select closed captions: To customize the closed captions: 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Preferences menu. If the selected service is not available. and color... Blue. edge. text size. White. 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Preferences menu.. Yellow. Red.

highlight Done and press@. highlight Reset and press @. occasionally there is no sound at all in SAP mode. . Audio Settings Advanced Audio Settings Audio Setup 3 Press" or ~ to select Audio. • If the stereo sound is noisy.2 Highlight Digital Audio Selector and press @. Adjusting the audio quality You can adjust the audio quality by adjusting the bass. the word "STEREO" or "SAP" appears on-screen when REOLL is pressed. Note: • You can typically leave the TV in Stereo mode because it will automatically output the type of sound being broadcast (stereo or monaural). highlight Done and press @. To reset the settings to the factory defaults. • If you have SAP on and the station you are watching is not broadcasting a second audio program. Note: • A second audio program (SAP) can be heard only on those TV stations that offer it. When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast. depending on your device. highlight 3 4 Reset and press 8. . language as a second audio program. To save the new settings. highlight Reset and press @. and then press ~ or ~ to select the desired service. 2 3 4 Highlight Audio Settings and press @. select Stereo. you will see the current program on the screen but hear the other language instead of the program s normal audio.The MTS feature is only available for analog signals on the ANT/CABLE input. the station s normal audio will be output. • ~ makes the bass or treble weaker or increases the balance in the left channel (depending on the item selected). or Balance). 44 . Press ~ or . To save the new settings. Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature allows you to output high-fidelity stereo sound. Press ~ or ~ to adjust the level. to highlight the item you want to adjust (Bass. In the MTS field. Press EXIT 4 o. If you have SAP on. To select the optical audio output format: To listen to a second audio program on an analog station (if available): Select SAP in step 3 above. However. • ~ makes the bass or treble stronger or increases the balance in the right channel (depending on the item selected) 2 3 4 Highlight Audio Setup and press @. To reset the settings to the factory defaults. . Highlight Audio Setup and press @. To listen to an alternate language on an ATSC digital station (if available): Highlight the Language field in step 3 above. and then press ~ or ~ to select the language you prefer. highlight Done and press @. Selecting the optical audio output format You can use this feature to select the optical audio output format when you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digital audio system to the Optical Audio Out terminal on the TV (see "Connecting a digital audio system" on page 18). To listen to stereo sound: 1 Press 0 MENU and open the Audio menu. music. In the Optical Output Format field. To revert to the factory defaults. MTS also can transmit a second audio program (SAP) containing a second language. For example. 5 To save the new settings. and balance. a station might broadcast another 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Audio menu. Treble. select either Dolby Digital or PCM. or other audio information (when provided by individual stations).. treble. select Mono to reduce the noise. If this happens. To adjust the audio quality: 1 Press 0 MENU and open the Audio menu. set the MTS feature to Stereo mode.

please try again!" appears. Reenter the PIN code to confirm it. the audio is output with minimal compression. Th e PIN code wIll be cleared and you can enter a new PIN code. 8. select Compressed. Locks Enable Rating Blocking Edit Rating Limits Channels Block Input Lock Control F'anel Lock GameTimer New PIN Code Off Off Off Off Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip) Some TV programs and movies include signals that classify the content of the program (violence. To save the new settings. 8. o f our tImes WIt h'III bve secon ds. • Entering the PIN code 2 3 4 5 6 Press'" to display the PIN code entering screen. allowing you to switch from ATSC to analog broadcasts at the same dynamic range. Channels Block.. Pleaseenw a4 digit PIN code -~§~ Lock System To use the Dolby Digital Dynamic Range Control: Confirm PIN code 1 2 3 Press 0 MENU and open the Audio menu. and press 8. 8. . Highlight Retry and press and press 8. PIN code has not been stored. Input Lock. Use the Number buttons to enter your four-digit code and press If the wrong PIN code is entered. Enter the code again Note: When the COlTect PIN code is entered. 8. highlight Done and press To revert to the factory defaults. the message "Incorrect PI N code. The new PIN code is now active. If you cannot remember your PIN code RECALL While the PIN code entering screen is displayed. the locks menu opens. Press'" to highlight New PIN Code and press 8. . Video. Press the Channel Number buttons to enter a new four-digit code. Using the Locks menu The Locks menu includes the Enable Rating Blocking. dialog. When Standard is selected. The V-Chip feature in this TV detects the signals and blocks the programs according to the ratings you select. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press 8.) 2 Press"'. . • The Lock System screen (below) appears if a 45 I .Using the Dolby® Digital Dynamic Range Control feature This dynamic range control feature causes the ATSC dynamic range to be further compressed. Changing your PIN code 1 Press 0 MENU and highlIght the locks menu icon. • This item will be grayed out for NTSC signals. and PC inputs • The Dolby Digital Dynamic Range Control will function in relation to Optical Output Format (PCM mode). press . ColorStream. You can use these features after entering the correct PIN code. sex. enter the code a second time to confirm. see the tables on the next page. which displays the PIN code entry screen . • Highlight Audio Setup and press 8. • The locks/Active screen appears if the PIN code is already stored. Front (control) Panel Lock. Edit Rating Limits. language). highlight Reset and press 4 8. Cancel Done In the Dolby Digital Dynamic Range Control field. and New PIN Code features. 1 Press M~U and highlight the Locks menu icon. Press Press the Number buttons to enter a new fourdigit code. (For rating descriptions.

content. T to highlight Enable Rating Blocking. nor is the availability of an additional rating system determined or controlled by Toshiba. 1DIn the Edit Rating limits screen. You will not be able to download any updates to the rating system should such updates become available.To block and unblock TV programs and movies: To download the additional rating system (if available): 1 2 3 4 5 Press Mt)'U and highlight the locks menu icon. The Edit Rating limits screen appears.. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press Press Press 8. ~ and then press to select the level of blocking you prefer. A box with an "X" is a rating that will be blocked. • The additional rating system can only be downloaded one time. availability. Press T to highlight Enable Rating Blocking. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press 8. • The additional rating system is not designed. therefore. and format may vary I 46 .. or controlled by the TV or Toshiba. Note: Downloading an additional rating system for blocking TV programs and movies In the future. • The information displayed in the Alternate Ratings screen will depend on the configuration of the additional rating system available at the time of download. Press.. 8. T . and then press 8. or controlled by the TV or Toshiba. Press T to display the PIN code entering screen. When you are finished selecting the ratings you want to block. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press Mt)'U and highlight the locks menu icon. ~ and T to select On. For Canada rating. transmitted. The Edit Rating limits screen appears. an additional rating system may become available for use in selectively blocking programs. The Edit Alternate Ratings screen will appear. A box with an "X" is a rating that will be blocked. you can another highlight the "Canada RS" then press "Canadian Rating Menu" screen will appear. a definition for the rating appears at the bottom of the screen. ~ and then press 8 to select the level of blocking you prefer. highlight Done and press a a 9 8 8. When done selecting the ratings you want to block. 8. • It may take several minutes for the TV to download the additional rating system. and press 8. transmitted. • The additional rating system is an evolving technology. As you highlight a rating. Press T to display the PIN code entering screen. 7 Highlight AU RS and press 8. highlight Done and press 8.. Note: Above selection of blocking level is for U. T to highlight Edit Rating limits and press 8.. highlight Done and press 8.. Similarly. Press Press ~ and T to select On. 7 Press. Note: Channels Block Input Lock Control Panel Lock GameTimer New PIN Code Off Oft Off 6 Press T to highlight Edit Rating limits and press • The Alt RS button will only be available if an additional rating system is currently available. Note: The currently tuned station must be receiving a digital signal before an additional rating system can be downloaded. S V-Chip system. the rating of programs in an additional rating system is not determined. T .

) D) Some suggestive dialog L) Infrequent coarse language S) Some sexual situations V) Moderate violence General Audience (Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages. • . If it is rated "None..• ~. TV-G TV-Y7.~~%~ntii~o~~~h. . programs that do not provide any rating information will not be blocked • To display the rating of the program you are watchmg.Independent rating system for broadcasters .s. RECALL TV-14 TV-PG Blocking channels With the Channels Block feature.kJJ~~~j:"'i~i'oll".::.~!~emi~2. " programs rated "None" will be blocked.) Directed to Older Children (This program is designed for children age 7 and above..tt.'1 :~J. Note: Programs in which fantasy violence may be more intense or more combative than other programs in this category are designated TV-Y7FV) All Children (This program is designed to be appropriate for all children. Press T to display the PIN code entering screen.-«- NC-17 R ..~~~~~jjl.' Mature Audience Only (This program is specifically designed to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for children under 17) l) Crude or indecent language S) Explicit sexual activity V) Graphic violence Parents Strongly Cautioned (This program contains some material that many parents would find unsuitable for children under 14 years of age.. CO~I. PG-13 5 Press'" T to highlight the channel you want to block and press @. TV-Y Enter your four-digit PIN code and press @ (~page 45).~J8/. coarse language S) Intense sexual situations V) Intense violence Parental Guidance Suggested (This program contains material parents may find unsuitable for younger children.. Independent rating system for movies ... Input Lock .. however.ol'Panel L~ck ..'. A list of the channels available for that input will be displayed along with the call letters for each channel. If rating information is not provided.. 47 I . You will not be able to tune blocked channels unless you unlock them.P$~.~~tll. no rating will appear in the RECALL screen. .) PG Parental Guidance Suggested (Some material may not be suitable for children) General Audience (Appropriate for all ages) G Note: TV-MA • If you place an "X" in the box next to " 'None'Rated.~'f>- :.:: :. " the word "NONE" appears in the RECALL screen (as shown below right). which puts an "X" in the box next to that channel. GameTimer "-::". if available. Press T to highlight Channels Block and then press @.tf:' X X-rated (For adults only) Not intended for anyone 17 and under Restricted (Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult) Parents Strongly Cautioned (Some material may be inappropriate for children under 13) . TVY7FV To block channels: 1 2 3 4 Press MOU and highlight the locks menu icon.) D) Intensely suggestive dialog l) Strong..~~ti~g.:. press 0 on the remote control._-~. OH" Off OH New PIN Code ~.W~~:~onjiQt~~~m~~". you can block specific channels.

o E:l E:l o o 4 5 Allow All Block All Cancel 10 To lock/unlock the video inputs: 1 From the Locks menu. 6 7 Repeat step 5 for other channels you want to block. press 8 to remove the "X" from the box. To set the GameTimer®: 1 2 From the Locks menu. Mode Video Description·· Locks VIDEO I. PC and channels 3 and 4. and Pc. 8. Press'" or T to select the length of time until the Input Lock is activated (30. When the GameTimer expires. I 48 . the E:l E:l EI '" 0 ~-~~~ 2 3 4 Enter your four-digit PIN code and press Press 8. ColorStream HD-2. HDMI 3. Using the input lock feature You can use the Input Lock feature to lock the video inputs (VIDEO 1. and will be enabled when the TV is turned on again. ColorStream HD-1. Co!orStream HDI/HD2. Ofr To unblock all locked channels at once: Highlight Allow All in step 5 on previous page and then highlight Done and press 5 Press 8. HDMI I. press'" T to highlight the channel you want to unblock. HDMI3 and PC) To deactivate the Input Lock once the GameTimer® has activated it: Set the Input Lock to Off (I&' "Using the input lock feature" as described above). VIDEO 2. HDMI I. To temporarily unlock the program: 1 2 Press MUTE o. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press Ir the correct code is entered. Locks VIDEO I. T to highlight Input Lock and press ~. Unlocking programs temporarily If you try to tune the TV to a program that exceeds the rating limits you set.60. HDMI1. ColorStream HD I/HD2. • Select Video+ if you play video tapes via an ANT/CABLE input. HDMI 3. 8. 8. HDMI 2. Video+ To block all channels at once: Highlight Block All in step 5 on previous page and then highlight Done and press 8. the TV will enter program lock mode and the following message will appear onscreen: This program exceeds the rating limit you set Push 'MUTE' to enter PIN You can either temporarily unlock the program or select an unlocked program to watch. All locking is disabled until the TV is turned otT. VIDEO 2. T to display the Enter your four-digit PIN code and press Press 8. Using the GameTimer® You can use the GameTimer to set a time limit for playing a video game (30-120 minutes). or 120 minutes) and press 8. highlight Done and press 8. press PIN code entering screen. Highlight Done and press Press'" or T to select the level of video input locking you prefer. 3 4 T to highlight GameTimer and press ~. To cancel the GameTimer®: Select Off in step 4 above. You will not be able to view the input sources or channels until you unlock the inputs.Channels Block AD and channels 3 and 4. the program lock mode is released and the normal picture appears. Press T to display PIN code entering screen. To unblock individual channels: In step 5 above. 90. VIDEO 2. the TV enters Input Lock mode and locks out the input source for the video game device. HDMI2. as described below. HDMI 2. Unlocks all video inputs and channels 3 and 4.

Press T to highlight Control Panel Lock.':' Hel ps to reduce noise and sharpen the picture. Setup Installation To lock the control panel: 1 Press 0 Press MENU . L k .button on the TV control panel for about 10 seconds until the volume icon appears. 4 Enter your four-digit PIN code and press @.Note: • A message will appear when 10 minutes. picture are cut off. Highlight PC Settings and press @.. The adjustment range is within ± I0 from center. T to highlight the item you want to 5 Press . If the picture is affected by interference. When a PC is connected to the TV's PC IN terminal. To adjust the PC settings: 1 Repeatedly press ~~ to select PC input mode (~~ "Selecting the video input source to view" page 34).'J~~:~1&Qff~ GameTimer New PIN Code Off Description Horizontal Position Vertical Position Moves the picture left/right. PC Settings Vertical Position Clock Phase Sampling Clock Auto Adjust Reset @. or ~ to make the appropriate adjustments.. or press and hold the VOLUME . When the control panel lock is On. When the control panel is locked and any button on the control panel (except POWER) is pressed. Press ~ and A or T to highlight On and press Press A or adjust. This is not a sign of malfunction. ~!. Using the control panel lock feature You can lock the control panel to prevent your settings from being changed accidentally (by children. * Moves the picture up/down. The adjustment range is within ±50 from center. when power is restored the TV will enter Input Lock mode (as if the GameTimer had been activated) and you will have to deactivate the Input Lock (as described above). you can use the PC Settings feature to make adjustments to the image. readjust the Horizontal Position and Vertical Position.. and 1 minute remain on the Game Timer • If the TV loses power with time remaining on the Game Timer. this feature will be grayed out in the Setup menu 2 3 4 5 T to display the PIN code entering screen. none of the controls on the TV control panel will operate except POWER. for example). Note: If a PC is not connected or there is no pc input signal. The adjustment range is within ± 16 from center. 3 minutes. and hIghlight the OC S menu Icon.. If the edges of the Clock Phase 49 I . Press 0 MENU 2 3 and open the Setup menu. ':: (continued) To unlock the control panel: Highlight Off in step 5 above. o o o Done o --0 • Locks Enable Rating Blocking Edit Rating Limits Off Channels Block Input Lock Off Off Note: The screen is disrupted momentarily when adjusting the PC settings. the message "NOT AVAILABLE" appears. Using the PC settings feature You can view an image from a PC on the TV screen.i \@!t4l1!t~~~l.. readjust the Clock Phase and Sampling Clock.

1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Setup menu. - CB Begins playback. PLAY . " the HDM/ 1 Audio setting is set to "Digital" and is grayed out in the menu. The adjustment range is within ± Ia from center. " the HDM/ 1 Audio setting changes to "Auto. Skips backward.''-. Repeatedly press S OEP to increase the time in la-minute increments. Rew inds/reverses.* Highlight this item then press @ to gel an optimum adjustment automaticall y. To set the sleep timer using the remote control: Press 0 on the remote control to set the len~h of time until the TV turns otT. the audio from the PC Audio inpul can be heard. Note: When a power failure occurs.& or T to increase or decrease the time in la-minute increments. the following REGZA-L1NK functions will be enabled. Fast-forwards. Skips forward.Sampling Clock Helps 10 reduce noise and minimize periodic vertical stripes on the screen. SLEEP m STOP PAUSE/STEP @!!!) ~ ~ FF SKIP SKIP To set the sleep timer using the on-screen menus: (ffi @ REW I 50 . there will be no audio. etc. or using the REGZALINK Player Control menu.-~<~- Setting the sleep timer You can set the sleep timer to turn off the TV after a set length of time (maximum of 180 minutes). Press the Number buttons to enter the lenglh of time in la-minute increments. 3 4 Auto Adjust * The default settings may vary depending on the input signal format. Note: A message will display on-screen when there is one minute remaining on the sleep timer. (Also see item 7 on page 12 and "Setting the HOMITM Audio mode" on page 32. . the PC Audio menu setting influences the HDM/1 Audio menu setting..--. To cancel the sleep timer: R epeate ell y press 0 SLEEP. you can control the connected REGZA-L1NK playback device you are watching. .1 inputs share the same set of analog audio inputs. Stops playback.? . • Using REGZA-LlNK@ This is a new feature that uses CEC technology and allows you to control Toshiba REGZA-LlNK compatible devices from the TV remote via HDMI connection (1& page 17). Highlight Sleep Timer and press @. To display the remaining sleep time: Press 0 SLEEP Setting the PC Audio This function allows you to output or mute Ihe sound from your PC when connecting using the PC IN terminal and an analog RGB cable. IS set to () minute. Note: Because the PC and HOM1. Pauses the picture during play or record mode. " If PC Audio is set to "Yes.\. No: When viewing the PC input. Highlight Done and press @. Highlight Audio Setup and press @. Available remote control key functions: Before using the following key functions. (1& page 19) . to a maximum of 180 minutes. first set the MODE SELECT switch on the remote control to TV. If PC Audio is set to "No. untl It .) REGZA-LlNK@ playback device (DVD player. Yes: When viewing the PC input.) control With your TV's remote control. Press'& or T 10 select PC Audio anel then press ~ or ~ to select No or Yes. the sleep timer setting may be cleared.. or press . When the Enable REGZA-LlNK in the REGZALlNK setup menu (o::w page 51) is sel to On. To set the PC Audio: 1 2 3 Press 0 MENU and open the AudIO menu.

In this case. 1 Press 0 MENU and open the Preferences menu. ~ Navigate contents menu. Accesses the menu of a DVD. • You can also use this function when the audio receiver is connected to the TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (not HOMI connection). the following functions will be enabled. This item will be grayed out unless a REGZALINK compatible audio receiver is connected. @. At this time. . REGZA-LlNK@ input source selection If a REGZA-LINK device with HDMI switching capability (e. Other REGZA-LlNK@ functions Power Top Menu Menu Contents Menu Turns the select device on and off. First. @ EXIT VOLUME and MUTE controls of Audio Receiver With your TV's remote control.. T . Accesses the top menu of a DVD.Channel Labeling Menu Language Channel Browser Setup English Off 01 ~'_~''W- 3 Press'" or T to select the item you want to control and press @. the REGZA·L1NK Player Control menu will disappear. the TV turns on automatically. set the MODE SELECT switch on the remote control to TV.g. etc. Note: • To use this function: . (continued) -A non-HOMI input is currently selected .. If a REGZA-L1NK device is turned on. • The REGZA-L1NK Player Control item will be grayed out in the following conditions: If a connected HDMI device starts playing video or audio. you can adjust or mute the sound volume of the Audio Receiver. etc. Speaker Preference 51 . Enters contents menu. the TV remote can be used to adjust or mute the volume of the audio. • 0 MUTE turns off the sound.The connected GEG device is not a playback or recording device.Set Speaker Preference to Audio Receiver in the REGZA-LiNK Setup menu .. etc) is selected for the Audio Receiver input source. you can select another REGZALINK device that is connected to the master HDMI device using the TV's INPUT button.Confirm that a connected REGZA-LINK device (such as OVO player. If the TV is turned otf the TV will send a message to turn off all of the REGZA-LINK devices connected to the TV. the TV will automatically switch to the appropriate HDMI input. Preferences CC Selector Base CC Mode Digital CC Sellings Input Labeling . From this item. Accesses the contents list when you press When the Enable REGZA-L1NK and each item in the REGZA-liNK Setup menu are set to On. See page 34 for details. When this item is set to Audio Receiver. Audio Receiver) is connected to the HDMI input. select a digital audio input mode on the Audio Receiver • These functions depend on the device connected 2 Highlight REGZA-L1NK Player Control and press @. you can set your audio output preference to the TV speakers or the audio receiver speakers.. TV Auto Input Switch TV Auto Power Device Auto Standby Note: • These functions depend on the devices that are connected..The Enable REGIA-LINK item is set to Off.. o Note: These functions depend on the devices connected REGZA-LINK® Player Control menu functions: •(vW ~ adjust the volume level. Returns to the previous menu.

the sound will be output from the audio receiver's speakers even if TV Speakers has been selected. and you will be away from the TV for an extended period of time you should unplug the power cord. Press'" or ~ to select On. Note: If it's possible. the Last Mode Memory feature automatically turns on the TV when the power is resupplied.. This feature functions in ANT/CABLE mode only.Note: When you tum on the Audio Receiver..) • If ANT/CABLE is the current input.. either "CABLE" (for cable TV) or "ANT' (for over-the-air broadcasts). or adjust the sound volume. t··t1iW.NMlII 52 II' I . • • • • TV Auto Input Switch: On/On' TV Auto Power: On/Off Device Auto Standby: On/Ott' Speaker Preference: TV SpeakerslAudio Receiver Note: The location of the banner can be moved to the top or bottom of the screen by pressing . To display TV status information using INFO: Press 0 on the remote control. highlight Done and press Understanding the auto power off feature The TV will automatically turn itself off after approximately 15 minutes if it is tuned to a vacant channel or a station that completes its broadcast for the day. To revert to the factory defaults.""'. '. .. highlight REGZA-L1NK Setup and press 8.. Dolby Digital or PCM) • Video resolution • Aspect ratio of incoming video signal (4:3 or 16:9) • V-Chip rating status • Game Timer (if set) TV.. To close the RECALL screen: Press RECALL 0 agalIl. etc. and press'" or ~ to select On or desired mode.xxx. change its input source. 8. • Channel number (if in ANT/CABLE mode) • Channel label (if set) • Digital signal strength indicator (bar graph in lower right corner of box.. . Tum the TV off and on again to output the sound from the TV speakers. 1_1-. The following additional information will display for off air digital channels (if appl icable): • Title • Duration • Detailed description INFO To set the REGZA-LINK® Setup: 1 2 3 4 From the Setup menu. The following information will display (if applicable): • Current input (ANT/CABLE. 11 :llOpm E$T Press'" or T to highlight the REGZA-L1NK Setup item you want to use. highlight Reset and press 8. VIDEO 1.. /ALB You"g . 5 To save the new settings. . Displaying TV status information To display TV status information using RECALL: Press RECALL Understanding the last mode memory feature If the power is cut off while you are viewing the 0 on the remote control. _. Press'" or T to highlight Enable REGZA-L1NK. for ATSC signal only) • Stereo. .-anMfI. Note: If you select Enable REGIA-LINK Off. 9:00pm. Mono or SAP audio status (when HDMI input mode. the other items will be grayed out..!iilli1i_. $ :todaV'!!ltijt:1rt. or T while the RECALL or INFO display is onscreen. ...

[n the Dynamic Contrast field. • G Drive: ~ makes the picture greenish. as described below. and Warm).. the picture mode automatically changes to Preference. highlight Done and press@. Press . S. or PC) and then change the color temperature mode. To revert to the factory defaults. 1 2 Press 0 MENU and open the Video menu. or T to select either BDrive or G Drive. the picture mode automatically changes to Preference. the detail of black colors will be increased. S.. Using the static gamma feature The static gamma feature allows you to adjust the levels of black in the picture. .Using the advanced picture settings features Using dynamic contrast When dynamic contrast is set to On. To save the new settings. or Warm). press'" or ~ to select the mode you prefer (Cool. select either Off or On. Standard. the detail of black colors wi II be decreased. To select dynamic contrast preferences: Selecting the color temperature You can change the quality of the picture by selecting from three preset color temperatures (Cool. • If the setting is moved in the minus direction. Medium. highlight Reset and press S. the TV will detect changes in the picture quality that affect the appearance of your contrast settings and then automatically adjust the video. 4 5 6 In the Color Temperature field. 2 3 Highlight Picture Settings and press S. Highlight Color Temperature and press Note: If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports. . or PC) and then change the dynamic contrast setting. Note: If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press • In the Static Gamma field. 53 I . Highlight Picture Settings and press @. Note: If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports. highlight Reset and press@. 1 2 3 Press 0 MENU and open the Video menu. S. The adjustment range is within ±5 from center. highlight Done and pressS. To adjust the static gamma settings: Note: The B Drive and G Drive settings are connected to the Color Temperature settings and will change based on which setting is selected in step 5 above. 4 To save the new settings. Standard. the picture mode automatically changes to Preference. • If the setting is moved in the plus direction. To revert to the factory defaults. highlight Reset and press To select the color temperature: 1 Press 0 MENU and open the Video menu. Movie. and then press'" or ~ to adjust the settings. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press 18. S. Standard.. Movie or PC) and then change the static gamma setting. highlight Done and press To revert the factory defaults. Medium. 01 Video. . press'" or ~ to adjust the static gamma. 7 To save the new settings. Mode Noise l1eduction Game Mode Mode Cool Medium Warm Picture Quality blueish neutral reddish Sports rlj~ijJat1)9)~~~~~~~~ Off Theater Settings 3 4 5 Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press @. Highlight Picture Settings and press S. Movie. • B Drive: ~ makes the picture blueish.

8. the menu will display the text "ONR. Middle or High. highlight Reset and press@. The Game Mode cannot be turned on when any other video input is selected. and High. . To save the new settings. This may be useful when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal (especially a Cable channel) or playing a noisy video cassette or disc. from lowest to highest. ColorStream HD2. and High. to select On and then press @. to highlight the MPEG Noise Reduction field.. To revert to the factory defaults. or VIDEO 2. . To select the MPEG noise reduction level: 1 2 3 4 Press 0 MENU and open the Video menu. Off is automatically selected when this feature is disabled ("grayed out"). and then press .. change the video input. Using MPEG noise reduction The MPEG noise reduction feature allows you to reduce visible interference caused by MPEG compression. VIDEO 1. or turn the TV off and then on again. Middle. " The available selections are Off. To change the CableClear settings: 1 2 Press MOU and open the Video menu. Using the Game Mode feature You can use the Game Mode feature for shorter frame delays when playing a video game requiring split-second timing between the on-screen display and input from the controller (such as music creation and high-action games). Choices for MPEG noise reduction are Off. or ~ to select either Off.. and High. In the CableClear field.. HDMI 1. Low.Using CableClear® digital noise reduction The CableClear@ digital noise reduction feature allows you to reduce visible interference in your TV picture... ColorStream HD2. highlight Done and press To revert to the factory defaults. Note: You can change the video input by pressing Q~ on the remote control (~ page 34). Press A or . Low. select your desired setting. 3 To save the new settings. Middle. " The available selections are Off. Middle. Press A or .. the menu will display the text "CableClear. highlight Done and press@. This feature is more effective for 480i and I080i input signals. HDMI2 or HDMI 3. respectively Note: To use the Game Mode feature. Highlight Noise Reduction and press @. highlight Noise Reduction and press 8. to highlight the Game Mode and then press ~. Note: • If the current input is ANT/CABLE. and High will reduce the noise in varying degrees. I 54 . ColorStream HD1. Press A or . highlight Reset and press @. Video 2. Middle. the current video input must be Video 1. Low. Low.. • If the current input is ColorStream HD1.. HDMI 1. To turn off Game Mode: Select Off in step 2 above. To turn on Game Mode: 1 2 3 Press 0 MENU and open the Video menu. Low. HDMI2 or HDMI3.

<- "II'~~' ~.. and then press'" or ~ to turn the QSound effect On or Off. 5 To save the new settings. 8. Press T or . Advanced Audio Settings QSound On .' ?.". -...'""":\<" Reset . To adjust the QSound® settings: 1 Put the TV in STEREO mode (Il@f" "Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts" on page 42).Using the advanced audio settings features Using the QSound® sound feature aSound@ is the original name for a positional threedimensional (30) sound processing algorithm from QSound Labs that creates 3D audio effects from multiple monophonic sources and sums the outputs to two channels for presentation over regular stereo speakers. highlight Done and press To revert to the factory defaults. ..'. Press 0 MENU 2 3 4 and open the Audio menu. 55 I . the QSound effect will not work. to highlight the QSound feature. .. highlight Reset and press Note: If the broadcast is monaural. 8..-_. • Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press 8..

PC. Replace the batteries or try the control panel bu \tons. press q~ a second time. Poor composite or S-video picture • If the TV is connected to an external A/V device (e. please contact your local broadcast. For device connection details. no picture will display when you select that particular input source. Set the closed caption feature to Off (1l?J' page 42). • The station may have broadcast difficulties. • Adjust the Tint and/or Color (1l?J~ page 42). Noisy picture • If you are watching an analog channel (offair broadcast or Cable TV). Black box on-screen • The closed caption feature is set to one of the Text modes (n.g. video games. you may notice that the sound and picture are slightly out of sync. You may want to try one or more of the following suggestions. TV stops responding to controls • If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV control panel and you cannot turn off the TV. Use a highly directional outdoor antenna (if applicable). DVDs). . set-top box. HOMI 3. cable. television broadcasts. • Press q~ on the remote control or TV and select a valid video input source (IrE page 34). VIDEO 2. Cannot view external signals or channel 3 or4 • If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDEO 1. and powE'R then press ® . ma ke sure TVNCR on th e <=:) remote control is set correctly (!Gil' page 22). which will change to the next video input source and display the Input Selection window. please check this chapter for a possible cause of the problem and some solutions you can try. you can set the CableClear@ feature to reduce visible interference in the TV picture (lQr' page 54). • Antenna reception may be poor. Picture problems General picture problems • Check the antenna/cable connections (IGI~ Chapter 2)..If you notice this phenomenon only on certain TV channels.) try using a ColorStream or HDMI video connection instead. TV will not turn on • Make sure the power cord is plugged in. which may help to reduce the effect of this phenomenon: . This phenomenon can be caused by various factors including.If the TV is connected to an AN receiver that has a programmable audio delay feature. see Chapter 2. video processing within the TV. If no device is connected to a particular input on the TV. Try another channel. press and hold the POWER button on the TV control panel for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV. • Adjust the picture qualities (IrE page 42). use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure (IGI~ page 33). make sure the Input Lock is set to Off (~ page 48). video processing in an attached gaming system.General troubleshooting Before calling a service technician. ColorStream QQ HDMll HOMI 2. or from channels 3 or 4. Picture and sound are out of sync • As with all products that contain a digital display. Other problems • If your TV's problem is not addressed in this Troubleshooting section or the recommended solution has not worked. • The remote control batteries may be dead. without limitation. when viewing certain content (e. you are usmg a VCR . video game system.. T3. in rare instances. DVD player. Poor color or no color • The station may have broadcast difticulties. or satellite provider to inform them of this issue. 56 . and video processing or different compression rates used by broadcasters in their programming. Video Input Selection problems • If the Input Selection window does not appear when you press q~ on the remote control or TV. • It. use this feature to help synchronize the sound to the picture. • Do not connect both a standard video cable and an S-video cable to the VIDEO 1 input at the same time (lIE page 14). Try another channel. . or T4). T2. etc.g.

• If you hear no sound. Refer to the owner's manual for your other device to determine its available features. press 0 four times within 5 seconds. then plug and turn on again. • The remote control batteries may be dead. • Your TV remote control may not operate certain features on your external device. turn off the closed caption feature (~ page 42). If you are still unable to tune digital channels. b) when the signal reception is weak. Closed caption problems • If the program or video you selected is not closed-captioned. Remote control problems • Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (I@f page 21). • Read the instruction manual furnished with the connected REGZA-LlNK device. Channel tuning problems • Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (~ page 21 ). check the antenna configuration (~ page 29). Also see "TV stops responding to controls" and "Other problems" (1lSr' page 56). Jf you are still unable to tune digital channels. Press VOLUME. • The channel may have been erased from the channel memory by the Channel Add/Delete feature. due to new standard adoption. • The station may have broadcast difficulties. • The sound may be muted. Set the MTS feature to Stereo mode (1lSr' page 44). • Remove all obstructions between the remote control and the TV. clear all channels from the channel list (~ page 30) and reprogram channels into the channel memory (1lSr' page 20). 57 I . • If text is not available.Sound problems • Check the antennalcable connections (1lSr' Chapter 2). • If the TV still does not act as expected. turn off your TV and unplug the power cord. use the remote control that came with the device (1& pages 22-26). Unblock the channel (~ page 47). • If you are unable to tune digital channels. d' RECALL co de enterIng screen IS (splayed. • A closed-caption signal may not display correctly in the following situations: a) when a videotape has been dubbed. If your TV remote control does not operate a specific feature on another device. make sure the MTS feature is set to SAP mode (IQ~ page 44). or c) when the signal reception is nonstandard (1& page 42). try setting the MTS feature to Stereo mode (1lSr' page 44). the SAP mode may be on. Try another channel. HOMI problems For HOMI cables • Make sure to use cables with the HDMI Logo (HOml) (1lSr' page 13). • If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source. use the Reset Factory Defaults procedure (~page 33). Add the channel to the channel memory (~page 30). • If you hear audio that seems "incorrect" for the program you are watching (such as music or a foreign language). REGZA-UNK feature may not operate properly. a black rectangle may appear. Replace the batteries (1& page 20). No REGZA-LiNK operation • The REGZA-UNK feature is available for Toshiba REGZA-UNK compatible devices. For Legacy HOMI source • Some legacy HDMJ sources may not work properly with the latest HDMI TV products. Rating blocking (V-Chip) problems • If you forget your PJN code: While the PJN · . use the Reset Factory Defaults procedure (~ page 33). • Make sure the HDMI cables with the HDMI Logo (HOml) are used. • The channel may be blocked by the Channels Block feature. If this happens. The PIN code you previously stored will be cleared (1& page 45). • When the connected REGZA-UNK device does not work correctly after you have changed settings of the device. no captions will display (1& page 42). • If several devices are connected.

3 Ibs (17. negative sync.5 mm) Height: 2' 1-5/8 inches (649.95 A Power Consumption 32RV525RZ/32RV52RZ: 0.6 W in standby mode 37RV525RZ/37RV52RZ: 0. HDMI Audio: 2-channel Linear-PCM. A through I) Super band (J through W) Hyper band (AA through ZZ.6 mm) Depth: 10-7/8 inches (276. Television System NTSC standard ATSC standard (8VSB) Digital Cable (64 QAM.3 kg) 37RV525RZ/37RV52RZ: 34.ColorStream® (component video) HD INPUT: Specificali 0 ns Note: • This model complies with the specifications listed below.6 W in standby mode 40RV525RZ/40RV52RZ:0. 480i AUDIO: 150 mV(nns). 75 ohm VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT: VIDEO: I V(p-p).6 mm) Height: I' 10-7/8 inches (580.7 V(p-p).6 W in standby mode 40RV525R/40RV52R: 0. 256 QAM. 100 through 135) Power Source: 120 V AC. 75 ohm PB: 0.8 kg) Operating conditions Temperature: 32°F .5mm) Height: 2'6 inches (761. 75 ohm. 22 k ohm or greater) VIDEO:Y: IV(p-p).75 A 40RV525RZ/40RV52RZ: 2. AAA. 75 ohm Suggested formats: 1080i.4lbs (15. 60 Hz Power Maximum Current 32RV525RZ/32RV52RZ: 1. unencrypted) Channel Coverage VHF: 2 through 13 UHF: 14 through 69 Cable TV: Mid band (A-g through A-I.80% (no moisture condensation) Supplied Accessories • Remote control with two size "AAA" batteries • Owner's manual (this book) • Cleaning cloth I 58 . C: 0.4 mm) 37 RV525RZ/37RV52RZ: Width: 3'-1/4 inches (921. 32/44.35°C) Humidity: 20 .2 Ibs (22.8 kg) 40RV525RZ/40RV52RZ:39.1/48 kHz sampling frequency. 16/20124 bits per sample DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT: Optical type PC INPUT: 15-Pin D-sub Analog RGB Dimensions 32RV525RZ/32RV52RZ: Width: 2'7-5/8 inches (804. negative sync.85 A 37RV525RZ/37RV52RZ: 1.3mm) Depth: 10-7/8 inches (276mm) 46RV525R/46RV525RZ: Width: 3'8-3/8 inches (1127. 75 ohm.6 kg) 40RV525R/40RV52R: 39.80 A 40RV525R/40RV52R: 2.3 Ibs (17.2 Ibs (12. 22 k ohm or greater HDMIIM INPUT: HDMI compliant (type A connector) HDCP compliant Audio Lip Sync supported Suggested formats: See table on the next page. 75 ohm PR: 0.3 mm) 40RV525R/40RV52R/40RV525RZ/40RV52RZ: Width: 3'3-1/4 inches (996.95°F (O°C . nop.6 mm) Height: 2'2-7/8 inches (683.6 W in standby mode Audio Power: 32RV525RZ132RV52RZ: 10 W + 10 W 37RV525RZ/37RV52RZ: lOW + lOW 40RV525R140RV52R: lOW + lOW 40RV525RZ/40RV52RZ: 10 W + 10 W 46RV525R/46RV525RZ: lOW + lOW Speaker Type: Two 1-5/8 x 7-7/8 inches (4 x 20 cm) Video/Audio Terminals S. AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30(Yn modulation equivalent.1 mm) Depth: 1'-3/4 inches (325.6 W in standby mode 46RV525R/46RV525RZ: 0.7 V(p-p).3 mOl) Mass (Weight) 32RV525RZ/32RV52RZ: 27. • Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.4 mm) Depth: 9-1/8 inches (232. • This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.VIDEO INPUT: Y: I V(p-p).286 V(p-p) (burst signal). 480p.75 A 46RV525R/46RV525RZ : 2. in-the-clear.8 kg) 46RV525R/46RV525RZ: 50. BBB) Ultra band (65 through 94.

000MHz 79.981 kHz 15.015Hz 60.879kHz 48. blur.Acceptable signal formats for PC IN and HDMI terminals PC IN signal formats Note: Depending on the connected PC.000MHz 65.000MHz SXGA 1280 x 1024 HDMI signal formats 640 x 480 SVGA XGA WXGA gOO x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 768 1360 x 768 SXGA 480i 480p nop 1080i I080p 1080p 1280 x 1024 59.175MHz 40.776kHz 47.000kHz 67.500MHz 85.776kHz 47.469kHz 45.000kHz 33.317Hz 60.090Hz 59.000MHz 74.940Hz 60.981kHz 25. the following status may occur.004Hz 59.470kHz 31.940Hz 60.469kHz 37.363kHz 47.870Hz 60.363kHz 47.750kHz 27.250MHz 148.015Hz 60.180MHz 25.250MHz 74.000MHz 27.000MHz 65.000MHz 79. or judder But this is not a malfunction of your TV VGA VGA SVGA XGA WXGA 640 x 400 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 768 1360 x 768 70.469kHz 37.175MHz 40.000MHz 27.250MHz 74.000Hz 24.000Hz 60.500MHz I08.000Hz 60.500kHz 25.020Hz 31. false format detection.870Hz 60.940Hz 60.500MHz 85. incorrect display.000Hz 31.879kHz 48.734kHz 31.940Hz 59.020Hz 59.317Hz 60.004Hz 59.500MHz 108. picture position failure.500MHz no x 480i no x 480p 1280 x nop 1920 x 1080i 1920 x I080p I920 x I080p 59 I .712kHz 63.712kHz 63.

WITHOUT LIMITATION. By registering your LCD Television you will enable TACP to bring you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification IS required under the US. GUARANTEES. (4) Labor service charges for set installation. personal computer level IEEE1394 devices. TACP WILL.S. Depending on the type of repair required. AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS.S. provide other prool of purcnase (2) All warranty servicing of this LCD Television must be performed by an Authorized TACP Service Station. accident. visit TACP's website at www. cable television distribution. OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY USE. misuse. INCLUDING. REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU For additional information.. INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING. whichever comes first Limited Warranty for Commercial Units TACP warrants LCD Televisions that are sold and used for commercial purposes as follows: all parts are warranted against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of onglnal retail purchase DURING THIS PERIOD.S. instructions furnished by TACP. AT TACP'S OPTION.A. com/service as soon as possible. No person. WITHOUT LIMITATION. use or malfunction through simultaneous use of this LCD Television and connected equipment. or use in violation of . CANADA AND MEXICO. Acts of God (such as lightning or fluctuations in electric power)..A. VCRs. AT TACP'S OPTION. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY ARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.tacp. REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR LABOR. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS LCD ELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE." you find that service is needed (1) To find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station. (2) You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to the TACP Authorized Service Station.S. LCD TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U. inadequate antenna systems.S. LOST PROFITS. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U. Consumer Produc:t Saf.S. adjustment of customer controls. LLC. ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES. setup. Your Responsibility THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS: (1) You must retain your oriqinal bill of sale or Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor TACP warrants this LCD Television and its parts against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail purchase. dealer. distributor. ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. visit TACP's website: www.A.Limited United States Warranty for LCD Televisions 26" and Larger Toshiba America Consumer Products. I 60 . or rendered illegible How to Obtain Warranty Service If after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and reviewing the section entitled "Troubleshooting. improper maintenance. DURING THIS PERIOD. Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your LCD Television online at www.tacp. and do not extend to any LCD Television or parts that have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the LCD Television or parts caused by fires. Rental Units The warranty for LCD Television rental units begins on the date of the first rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm.A. THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES..A. BUSINESS INTERRUPTION.S. CANADA AND MEXICO.. INCLUDING. LCD TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN THE U. ("TACP") makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in the United States. TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will come to your home when warranty service IS required. AS HEREBY LIMITED. misaligned satellite dishes. Failure to complete and return the product registration card does not diminish your warranty rights. and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered by this warranty Reception problems caused by . altered. AGREEMENTS.com/service or contact TACP's Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1-800631-3811.A. agent. or Puerto Rico.A. (3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if this LCD Television is purchased and operated in the Continental U. the service will either be performed in your home or the LCD Television will be taken to a TACP Authorized Service Station for repair and returned to your home at no cost to you. AND USED IN THE U. MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS LCD TELEVISION).tacp.ety Act. improper installation. DVD players/recorders. defaced. During this period. or to units that have been modified or had the serial number removed. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES. or company is Owner's Manual and Product Registration Card Read this owner's manual thoroughly before operating this LCD Television. and any other connected signal source device are your responsibility (5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited above.com ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U. TACP WILL.

(a) FOR TELEVISIONS 32 INCHES OR lESS YOU MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE TELEVISION TO A TCl TELEVISION AUTHORIZED SERVICE PROVIDER ("ASP"). Limited Canadian Warranty for Toshiba Brand Flat Panel Televisions Toshiba of Canada limited ("TCl") makes the follOWing limited warranties to original consumers in Canada. Your Responsibility THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOllOWING CONDITIONS: (1) You must provide your bill of sale or other proof of purchase. (c) FOR TELEVISIONS 32 INCHES OR lESS: YOU MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE TELEVISION TO AN ASP. WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT. YOU MUST PAY FOR All TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP. (2) All warranty servicing of this Television must be performed by an ASP. THE UNITED STATES AND MEXICO. THE ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES. setup. or should have discovered. (5) Warranties extend only to material defects in materials or workmanship as limited above. abuse. the service will either be performed in your home or the Television will be taken to an ASP for repair and returned to your home at no cost to you. improper Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labour Subject to the more limited warranty if the Television is used for any commercial or business purposes as set out below. OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. the defect. [0305] the type of repair required. SOME STATES OF THE U.S. Depending on 61 . IF YOU ARE NOT WITHIN 100 KilOMETERS OF AN ASP. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC lEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE IN THE U. ASP personnel will come on-site when warranty service is required. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.authorized to change. WITHOUT LIMITATION.A. AND USED IN CANADA. THEREFORE. Service. TCl Will. Rental Units The warranty for Television rental units begins with the date of first rental or thirty (30) days from the date of shipment to the rental firm. the service will either be performed on-site or the Television will be taken to an ASP for repair and returned at no cost to you. 24/7 applications. misuse. neglect. ON-SITE SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100 KilOMETERS OF AN ASP. (b) FOR TELEVISIONS OVER 32 INCHES During this period. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems are your responsibility. repairs or replacement made necessary by accident. DURING THIS PERIOD. dirt. YOU MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE TELEVISION TO AN ASP. ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTI ES. AT TCL:S OPTION. dust. TCl warrants the Television and its parts against material defects in materials or workmanship that result in the Television failing for a period of one (1) year after the elate of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD. modify. and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered by these warranties. IN-HOME SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100 KilOMETERS OF AN ASP. and do not extend to: a. TCl Will. adjustment of customer controls. ASP personnel will come to your home when warranty service is required. TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN CANADA. Depending on the type of repair required. (d) FOR TELEVISIONS OVER 32 INCHES During this period. REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR lABOUR. TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF CANADA. (3) The warranties from TCl are effective only if the Television is (i) purchased as new and unopened from TCl or from TCl's authorized distributors. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS TOSHIBA BRAND FLAT PANEL TELEVISION (the ''TElEVISION(S)'' or "Television(s)") AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE. WITHOUT LIMITATION. YOU MUST PAY FOR All TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF CANADA INCLUDING. Limited Warranty for Commercial Units TCl warrants Televisions that are used for any commercial or business purposes as follows: all parts are warranted against material defects in materials or workmanship that result in the Television failing for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of original retail purchase. INCLUDING. damage. YOU MUST PAY FOR All TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP. IFYOU ARE NOT WITHIN 100 KilOMETERS OF AN ASP. liquids. whichever comes first.S. or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever. THE UNITED STATES AND MEXICO. AT TCL:S OPTION. YOU MUST PAY FOR All TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES FOR THE TELEVISION TO AND FROM THE ASP.A. The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law of the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days from the date you discover. accident. DO NOT AllOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY. This limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any state of the USA. dealers or resellers ("ADR's") and (ii) located/ operated in Canada (4) labour charges for set installation. YOU MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE TELEVISION TO AN ASP. ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES. moisture.

BREACH OF CONTRACT. TOSHIBA CORPORATION. improper cleaning. User manuals or guides as to usage and/or storage. CONDITIONS AND REPRESENTATIONS FOR THIS TELEVISION. THEIR AFFILIATES. including fire. Disclaimer and Limitation of Remedy TO THE EXTENT NOT PRECLUDED BY lAW. agent. INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES. j installation. I. h. WHETHER MADE BY TCL. IF YOU FAil TO DO SO. THIS WARRANTY WilL NOT COVER ANY SERVICE THAT IS REQUIRED. TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE). INCIDENTAL. ADRs OR ASPs (THE "RELATED PARTIES") BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES MONEY. d. e. TOSHIBA CORPORATION. power failures. screen burn or image retention caused by prolonged display of static images and/or phosphor aging. f. IN NO EVENT Will TCl. improper maintenance. lOST SAVINGS. and service made necessary by the use or installation of non-Toshiba modifications to the Television.). YOU MUST READ AND FOLLOW All SET-UP AND USAGE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE APPLICABLE USER GUIDES AND/OR MANUALS. MONEY. distributor. improper operation. discarded or lost parts. Repair of damage that is cosmetic only or does not affect the Television functionality. ADVERTISEMENT. Replacement of missing. REIMBURSEMENT. IN PART OR IN WHOLE. EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. and Damage to the Television caused by failure to follow the specifications. On-site service and repair of the Television. acts of God. AS A RESULT OF ANY FAilURE TO FOLLOW THE SET-UP AND USAGE INSTRUCTIONS. IF THE APPLICABLE LAW. TO THE EXTENT NOT PRECLUDED BY LAW. Service made necessary by the simultaneous use of this Television and connected equipment. such as wear and tear. SERVICED. I 62 . c. or repairs. WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY. OR WHETHER ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELEVISION. THIS WRIDEN WARRANTY SUPERCEDES AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY OTHER WARRANTY. CONDITIONS AND REPRESENTATIONS ARE OTHERWISE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE TERM OF THIS EXPRESS WRIDEN LIMITED WARRANTY. modify or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever. Service of a Television on which the TOSHIBA label or logo. theft. the provision of retrofits. PRECLUDES THE EXCLUSION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES. IF THE TELEVISION FAilS TO WORK AS WARRANTED ABOVE. INCONVENIENCE OR OTHER SPECIAL. THEIR AFFILIATES. Service on third party products or service made necessary by use of incompatible third party products. dealer or company is authorized to change. ADRs AND ASPs AND WHETHER MADE ORALLY OR IN WRITING (INCLUDING ANY STATEMENT IN ANY BROCHURE. alteration. rating label or serial number have been defaced or removed. THIS TELEVISION MAY NOT FUNCTION PROPERLY AND YOU MAY SUFFER DAMAGE. STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. COSTS OR EXPENSES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER INCLUDING ANY DIRECT OR INDIRECT DAMAGES. Service on Toshiba-branded accessory items (such accessory items may be covered by their own warranty). Modifications to the Television not approved in writing by TCl. ANNOUNCEMENT. LOST PROFITS. or any other external cause or event. modifications or replacements by persons other than those authorized by TCl to service the Television. or preventive mai ntenance. PRESS RELEASE. No person. act or omission outside the control of TCl. STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. power surges or power shortages. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY AND SHALL BE VOID AND UNENFORCEABLE IF THE TELEVISION IS OPENED. ALL OTHER EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES. POINT OF SALE DISPLAY. DAMAGE TO PROPERTY OR ERSON.b. ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED AND EXCLUDED. COSTS OR EXPENSES. UNDER A STATUTE OR UNDER ANY OTHER LAW OR FORM OR ACTION. REIMBURSEMENT. VEN IF ANY OF THE RELATED PARTIES HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR OF ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO DAMAGES. CONDITIONS AND REPRESENTATIONS THEN SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTIES. other electrical faults. normal wear and tear. CONDITION OR REPRESENTATION NOT STATED IN THIS WARRANTY. YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHAll BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE PART. ETC. lightning. OR REPAIRED BY PERSONS OTHER THAN THOSE AUTHORIZED BY TCl TO SERVICE OR REPAIR THE TELEVISION. g. CONDITIONS AND REPRESENTATIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. scratches and dents.

press releases. this limited warranty shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of Ontario If there is any inconsistency between this limited warranty. CONSEQUENCES AND DAMAGES THAT MAY ARISE OR RESULT FROM THE USE OF THE TELEVISION IN ANY CRITICAL APPLICATIONS. disputes controversies and disagreements are collectively referred to as the "Dispute"). announcement. applicable in respect of the other or remaining Related Parties. or otherwise relating to: (i) this warranty. toshiba.ca.ASSUME SOLE AND FUll RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUCH USE TCl RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REFUSE TO SERVICE ANY TELEVISION USED IN A CRITICAL APPLICATION. advertising. Failing such agreement. nuclear facilities or systems or any other applications where Television failure could lead to injury to persons or loss of life or catastrophic property damage. point of sale display. ADRs OR ASPs . ITS AFFILIATES. How to Obtain Warranty Services If. (iii) any oral or written representations. on the one hand. visit TCL's web site at www. any claim. For additional information. dispute. There will be a charge to cover the costs of providing the source code. To the extent not precluded by law. If and to the extent that any provision of this limited warranty as it relates to any of the Related Parties is found to be invalid or unenforceable in respect of that party (the "Excluded Party") the Excluded Party shall be deemed to be severed or excluded from the provision. you find that service is needed: (1) To find the nearest ASP. IF THE CUSTOMER USES THE TELEVISION IN ANY CRITICAL APPLICATION. no claim. the arbitration will be conducted by one arbitrator pursuant to the laws and rules relating to arbitration generally in force in the jurisdiction in which you reside at the time that the Dispute arises. (ii) the Television. brochures. (iv) the relationships that result from this warranty. and any statement in the packaging of the Television or in any other document enclosed with. TCl. controversy or disagreement of any other person may be joined or combined with any Dispute by you. Critical Applications The Television you have purchased is not designed for any "critical applications. the unenforceable provision shall be severed from the warranty and deemed not to form part of the warranty. tort (including negligence and negligent and/or fraudulent misrepresentation). and the provision shall remain valid enforceable and 63 . statements. The remaining provisions of this warranty shall be and remain valid and enforceable. To the extent not precluded by law.AND NOT TCl." "Critical applications" means life support systems. the Television. without the prior written consent of TCl. you further agree to opt out of any such representative or class proceedings. shall be referred to and resolved by final and binding arbitration (to the exclusion of the courts). the provisions of this limited warranty shall prevail. ADRs AND ASPs HEREBY DISCLAIM ANY AND All LIABILITY. controversy or disagreement (whether for breach of warranty. or used in the context of the promotion or sale of. breach of contract. toshiba. after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and checking the "Troubleshooting" section. General Provisions If and to the extent that any provision of this limited warranty should generally be found to be unenforceable. connections to implanted medical devices. or promotional material relating to the Television. you agree to waive any right that you may have to commence or participate in any representative or class proceeding against the Related Parties relating to any Dispute. visit TCl's website at www. To the extent permitted by law. ITS AFFILIATES. Arbitration of any Dispute will be conducted in the forum and in the manner as agreed to between you and TCl.ca A copy of the GPl source code in this product may be obtained by contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811 . on the other hand. THE CUSTOMER . or call toll free 1-800-268-3404 (2) Present your bill of sale or other proof of purchase to the ASP. under a statute or under any other law or form of action) against any of the Related Parties arising out of. (the foregoing claims. If and where applicable and to the extent not precluded by law.Arbitration and Dispute Resolution To the extent not precluded by law. commercial transportation. DAMAGES AND CONSEQUENCES ARISING OUT OF THE SERVICE OR REFUSAL TO SERVICE SUCH TELEVISION AND FURTHER DISCLAIM ANY AND All LIABILITY. dispute. medical applications.

and SurfLock are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products. KIRKLAND. QUEBEC. REGZA-L1NK is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation. and TheaterWide are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products.TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS J L. CANADA . TOSHIBA OF CANADA LTD. LEBANON. V5A 1X8. U. TN 37087. NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION: 1420-B TOSHIBA DRIVE. Channel Browser.5400 MONTREAL: 18050 TRANS CANADA. ONTARIO.L. GameTimer.TEL: (905) 470.L. NJ 07470. L3R 8H2. MARKHAM.S. B. DynaLight. ONTARIO L3R 8H2. ColorStream. WAYNE.C.L. MARKHAM.TEL: (905) 470-5400 SERVICE CENTERS: TORONTO: 191 McNABB STREET.TEL: (514) 390-7766 VANCOUVER: 6932 GREENWOOD STREET. L. HEAD OFFICE: 191 McNABB STREET.A. L. PRINTED IN CHINA TOSHIBA .C. BURNABY. CANADA . H9J 4A 1. CANADA .TEL: (604) 303-2500 CableClear. CANADA . USA. Corporate Headquarters: 82 TOTOWA ROAD.C.C..

face vers Ie bas. ATTENTION :Avant de commencer I' assemblage du support de table. sur une surface plane. AVERTISSEMENT :Pour eviter tout risque de choc electrique. matelassee. cushioned surface such as a quilt or blanket. 111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111I1111111 HF6TB370011 .® xl x4 WARNING: To prevent possible electric shock. Leave the bottom of the unit protruding over the edge of the surface and assemble pedestal as indicated below. empEkher Ie cordon electrique d'etre coince en fixant Ie piedestal. comme sur une courtepointe ou une couverture. Laisser depasser Ie bas de I'unite du rebord de la surface et monter Ie support de table tel qu'indique ci-dessous. protect the power cord from being pinched when attaching the pedestal stand. placer avec soin I'avant du panneau ACL. carefully lay the front of the LCD Panel face down on a flat. Remarque : Toujours faire tres attention quand vous attachez Ie support de table pour eviter d'endommager Ie panneau ACL. CAUTION: Before beginning pedestal assembly. Note: Extreme care should always be used when attaching the pedestal stand to avoid damage to the LCD panel.

Ie service etles garanties en visitant la section Sautien a la clientele de notre site Web: www. la garantie au les pieces. warranty or parts.tacp. please contact our Customer Service Department at: 1·(800) 631-3811 (For US Customers) 1-(800) 268-3404 (For Canadian Customers) Many questions regarding parts.toshiba. veuillez appeler notre departement du service a la clientele au: 1-(800) 631-3811 (Etats·Unls seulement) 1-(800) 268·3404 (Canada seulement) Vaus trouverez egalement des reponses de nombreuses questions sur les pieces.com (For US Customers) www.toshiba.If you are experiencing a technical problem or have questions regarding operation.ca (For Canadian Customers) THANK YOU Si vous eprouvez des difficultes techniques ou si vous avez des questions concernant Ie fanctionnement du produit.. service.ca (Canada seulement) a MERel '-PLEASE SEE OPPOSITE SIDE OF THIS PAPER FOR QUICK SETUP DIRECTIONS'.cam (Etats-Unis seulement) www. authorized service centers.tacp.> . and warranties can be answered by visiting the Customer Support Section of our website: www. les centres de service autarises.

relax and enjoy the superior quality of High-Definition.Pleaserememberlocompleteyourproduc1 registration.Up Guide (For US customers) Congratulations on the purchase of your new Toshiba High-Definition Television. (use the red and white audio connections) ColorScream· HO Component may also be used to receive HOT¥. (Additional monthly 3 SATELLITE Satellite Customers will need a High-Definition satellite receiver and appropriate dish hardware. There are 3 basic ways to receive an HDTV Signal on your new High-Definition TV Over-The. there are 3 standard connections that can be used to receive an HD signal. but it is not HOTV! See the difference HD Programming makes! II 3 subscription cost may apply) II 4 Once you have a High-Definition Signal you need to connect it to a High-Definition Input on your TV.. TV INPUT OUTPUT Cable box I Satellite box HOml . If you are experiencing problems please call Toshiba Customer Service at 1-800·631-381 I All cables lind AOOptera IIle sold separately.. This is a digital connection that carries both digital video and digital audio. even on rhe some network.l onolog TV channels ond HD chonnels. NOle: Slondan.Air (Antenna) Connect a high quality outside antenna (not supplied) directly 2 CABLE Cable Customers will need to subscribe to High-Definition Digital Cable from your local provider.0'l Digital Cable or Digital Satellite is not HDTV. INPUT TV OUTPUT Cable box I Satellite box INPUT """" • RlYPloPR . Failure 10 register your produc1 does not disminish your warranty righlS. C TV t . If you are connecting directly from an antenna or basic cable.wallon ») . fOf additional Toshiba Producllnlormation visit www. " ~~ . The picture quality is superior to standard analog cable. This connection will require a separate analog audio connection. Connect the cable directly to the antenna input on the back of the Tv. this will require a separate analog audio connection as well.f. Tune to an HD Channel (Remember not all channels are currently broadcast in HD) Sit back...""""c "" • Ii:) ~ Hi:Jml Now that you have HD Programming and are connected to an HD Input. .to HDMI- DVI to HDMI" Component Video Input To connect directly from an antenna or basic cable. OVI carries digital video only. Your HO Cable Box or HO Satellite Receiver may have a OVI connection. There are 3 jacks color-coded with Red-Green-Blue on the back of the TV and HO Cable Box or HO Satellite Receiver. This will be connected to the HOMr" jack on the TV using an HOMI'" cable and an HOMI"' to OVI converter. Use if no HOMI"' or OVI jack is available..Ii:) • • • '""" "''''' .~~t. fJlample:ABC aoolog may be on channel 4.com. If are using an HD Cable Box or HD Satellite Box. You must get HD Signal to get an HD Picture! Getting HDTV is as easy as 1. (use the red and white audio connections) INPUT TV OUTPUT Cable box I Satellite boK HOml . Therefore. (Reception cannot be guaranteed and is based on proximity [0 local signal) Additional HOTV Antenna Reference Information nn be obtained from www. while ABC-HD may be on channel 1O. HOMI'" is the best connection for HOTV.lacp. ! I YiU Antenna Input 2 HDMI.Ii:) • • • .antenna~b. (Additional monthly subscription cost may apply) to the antenna input on the Tv. " "" .. t~ttt TOSHIBA Ludlnt . .HDTV Quick Set. broodcosl on different channels..2 or 3.

from my retail dealer No. Would you like to obtain more information from Toshiba on extended warranties: 2. but contract was offered by my retail dealer No.Congratulations for choosing Toshiba. May we contact you? DYes 0 No Email: _ Thanks for taking the time to fill out this questionnaire.tacp. write the complete model number of the product you purchased in the space below. contract was not offered § 0 0 ~ . Yes. PRODUCT SAFETY NOTIFICATION: Registering our product will allow us to contact you in the unlikely event a product safety notification is required. Which of the following products do you own? Product Manufacturer ___ TV . ~ Date of Purchase LULULU Month Day Year Area Code Area Code IMPORTANT! To ensure your enrollment in Toshiba's Consumer Information Program. 0 Mr. 1. 05. 3. 2. Please complete the following Product Registration Card. o II1IIII111111I11111111I11I111111I11I1111111111111111I111I1II1111 HF6V42T0121 . Your answers will be used for market research studies and reports. IMPORTANT: Please register your product within 10 days by mail or register online @ www. 03. you would prefer not to participate in the opportunity. Model Number 4. ToshibC'.projection TV ___ TV . Serial Number 5. By registering your product you will automatically be enrolled in our Consumer Information Program. 10. 6. serial number. The information we are asking from you below will help us bring you new products specifically designed to meet your needs. reliable and innovative products. and other information on this card in our files for up 10 ten years. your registration will serve as your proof of purchase for insurance purposes. Why did you choose this product? ___ brand image ___ quality ___ price ___ purchased other Toshiba products ___ technology ___ reliability ___ recommended by a friend/family ___ product reviews Check all that apply 5. 02. 01 Year 2 Years Yes 3. flood or theft. prioritize the following: 1. 09. What do you look for when purchasing CE products: ___ style. No ~ Received as a Gift Department Store Discount Store TV/Appliance Store Specialty/Electronics Store Warehouse/Membership Club 07. we need to understand our customers' needs. In the event of fire. 06. 4. ~ Catalog Showroom Rental Dealer Mail Order Premium Offer Other fold here With #1 being the most important. Where do you get new product information? ___ newspaper ___ tech magazines news broadcasts on-line ___ product literature ___ retail salesperson other 2. Price paid (excluding tax) $ Have you purchased a service contract or extended warranty for this product? 1. What resources do you use to make your purchase decision? ___ friends/family on-line research ___ retail salesperson ___ product reviews other 3. To uphold our commitment to excellence. 0 0 o 3 Years More than 3 Years b.toshiba.tabletop TV Combination ___ TV . 11.stand alone Other 6. is committed to producing high-quality. Where was this product purchased? a. 2.00 7.com/register 1. cosmetics ___ picture quality brand ___ quality ___ price ___ technology ___ reliability 4. 0 Mrs. Please check here if. 0 Ms. 3. 01. 3. No. 0 Miss Email address I I Apt. CONFIRMATION OF OWNERSHIP: We will keep the model number. for some reason. which provides you with the following benefits: 1. 08. If you answered "yes" to 6. 2. how long does your service contract or extended warranty last? 1.flat panel/plasma ___ DVD player Home Theater in a Box TiVo® ___ Home Networking Server ___ Computer ___ Audio Player ___ Digital Camera ___ Digital Camcorder Receiver ___ Speakers . a leader in developing tomorrow's technology today. 04. WARRANTY SERVICE: Filling out this card will help us contact you in case there is a problem with this product.

L.. Do not staple. » 82 Totowa Road »Wayne. . If you have comments or suggestions about our product.. L. NJ 07470 Copyright © 2004 All Rights Reserved Please seal with tape.C. See details inside. please write to: Toshiba America Consumer Products. Failure to complete and return this card does not diminish your warranty rights.IMPORTANTI TOSHIBA Image is Everything ™ PRODUCT REGISTRATION CARD Complete and return this Product Registration Card within 10 days to receive valuable Toshiba information.

Box 174007 Denver. P. L.C.O.L. CO 80217-4007 .Please send products and other correspondence to: Toshiba America Consumer Products.C. L. Toshiba America Consumer Products.L. NJ 07470 First Class Postage Required Post Office will not deliver without proper postage. 82 Totowa Road Wayne.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->